IM CMZ900D E 6th

CMZ 900D
Gyrocompass
User’s Manual
IM 80B10M-17E
IM 80B10M-17E
6th Edition
i
CMZ900D Gyrocompass
User’s Manual
IM80B10M-17E 6th Edition
CONTENTS
Foreword .................................................................................................................vi
1. Overview.................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Features of CMZ900 .......................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Gyrocompass System ...................................................................................... 1-3
1.3 Device Composition Type ................................................................................ 1-4
1.4 Connection with External Devices .................................................................. 1-5
1.4.1 Input Signal ........................................................................................ 1-5
1.4.2 Output Signal ..................................................................................... 1-5
1.5 Outline of Operation ......................................................................................... 1-6
1.5.1 Startup and Stoppage ........................................................................ 1-6
1.5.2 Operation Unit .................................................................................... 1-6
1.5.3 Normal Display................................................................................... 1-7
1.5.4 Output Heading Selection .................................................................. 1-9
1.5.5 Command Function ........................................................................... 1-9
1.6 Outline of Alarm .............................................................................................. 1-11
1.6.1 The Display When Alarm is Generated ........................................... 1-11
1.6.2 Buzzer Stop...................................................................................... 1-11
1.6.3 Confirmation of Alarm Causes ......................................................... 1-11
1.7 Maintenance and Inspection ......................................................................... 1-12
1.7.1 Daily Inspection................................................................................ 1-12
1.7.2 Regular Inspection ........................................................................... 1-12
1.8 Definition of Terms.......................................................................................... 1-13
2. Hardware ................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Component Models .......................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Component Names and Functions ................................................................. 2-3
2.2.1 Master Compass [MKM026] ............................................................. 2-3
2.2.2 Control Box [MKC327] ..................................................................... 2-4
2.2.3 AC Adapter [MKS066/MKS071] ...................................................... 2-4
2.2.4 Repeater Compass [MKR050].......................................................... 2-5
2.2.5 Junction Box [MKN019] ..................................................................... 2-6
2.2.6 Steering Repeater Compass [MKR056] ............................................ 2-6
3. Operation................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Startup and Stoppage....................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 The Procedure of Startup and Stoppage ........................................... 3-1
IM80B10M-17E 6th Edition : Aug.01,2014-00

ii
3.1.2 Startup Sequence .............................................................................. 3-2
3.1.3 Hot Start and Cold Start ..................................................................... 3-3
3.2 Operation Unit ................................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.1 The Name of Each Part of C.Operation Unit and Its Functions......... 3-6
3.2.2 The Name of Each Part of M.Operation Unit and Its Functions ........ 3-8
3.3 Display of Normal State.................................................................................. 3-10
3.4 Command Mode .............................................................................................. 3-12
3.4.1 The Classification of Command Functions ...................................... 3-12
3.4.2 Command Code List ........................................................................ 3-13
3.4.3 Operation in the Command Mode ................................................... 3-15
3.4.4 The Procedure for Changing the Value ........................................... 3-18
4. Function Explanation and operation method ....................................... 4-1
4.1 Display Functions ............................................................................................. 4-1
4.1.1 Displaying Heading ............................................................................ 4-2
4.1.2 Displaying Heading Deviation............................................................ 4-3
4.1.3 Displaying Rate of Turn...................................................................... 4-4
4.1.4 Displaying Running Time ................................................................... 4-5
4.1.5 Dimmer and Contrast Rank Display and Adjust ................................ 4-6
4.1.6 Displaying Gyrosphere Phase Current .............................................. 4-7
4.1.7 Displaying Backup Battery Voltage.................................................... 4-8
4.1.8 Displaying Deviation Volatage ........................................................... 4-9
4.1.9 Dispalying Software Version Number .............................................. 4-10
4.2 Setting Functions............................................................................................ 4-13
4.2.1 External Heading Input Selection .................................................... 4-14
4.2.2 Speed Setting for Speed Error Correction ....................................... 4-15
4.2.3 Latitude Setting for Speed Error Correction .................................... 4-17
4.2.4 Automatic Alignment of Master Compass ....................................... 4-19
4.2.5 Manual Alignment of Master Compass............................................ 4-21
4.2.6 Setting the Master Compass Follow-up Gain .................................. 4-23
4.2.7 Displaying/Resetting Cause of Master Compass Alarm.....................4-24
4.2.8 Displaying/Resetting Cause of C.Operation Unit Alarm .................. 4-25
4.2.9 Deviation Alarm Setting.................................................................... 4-26
4.2.10 Startup Timer Setting ....................................................................... 4-27
4.3 Maintenance Functions .................................................................................. 4-33
4.3.1 Permission for Maintenance Function ............................................. 4-34
4.3.2 Outputting Simulated DAC Signals.................................................. 4-35
4.3.3 Manual Drive of Master Compass ................................................... 4-37
4.3.4 Manual Drive of Repeater Compass ............................................... 4-38
4.3.5 Resetting Gyrosphere Running Time .............................................. 4-39
4.3.6 Resetting logged data ...................................................................... 4-40
4.3.7 Initializing Backup Memory .............................................................. 4-41
4.3.8 Correction of the Master Compass Installation Error ...................... 4-42

iii
4.3.9 Displaying logged data..................................................................... 4-45
4.4 Generation Function ....................................................................................... 4-56
4.4.1 Permission for Generation Function ................................................ 4-57
4.4.2 Setting the Follow-up Speed for Stepper Signal.............................. 4-58
4.4.3 Setting Communication Protocol of Output Port.............................. 4-59
4.4.4 Setting Format of Output Port .......................................................... 4-60
4.4.5 Setting Format of Input Port ............................................................. 4-65
4.4.6 Miscellaneous .................................................................................. 4-72
4.5 Heading Signal Selection ............................................................................... 4-81
4.5.1 Prohibition of Heading Changeover................................................. 4-81
4.5.2 Gyrocompass Heading Changeover Method................................................... 4-82
4.5.3 External Heading Changeover Method ........................................... 4-86
4.6 "MUTE" Function of Alarm Sound ............................................................... 4-87
5. Troubleshooting ....................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Advice for Specific Situations ......................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Alarm .................................................................................................................. 5-2
5.2.1 The Display When Alarm has been Generated ..................................... 5-2
5.2.2 Confirmation of Error Factor .............................................................. 5-3
5.2.3 Cancellation of Alarm ......................................................................... 5-3
5.2.4 Presumption Causes and Countermeasures .................................... 5-4
5.3 Repeater Compass Error Contents and Countermeasures......................... 5-9
5.3.1 The Display when Alarm has been Generated on the Repeater Compass
........................................................................................................... 5-9
5.3.2 Procedure for Aligning Repeater Compass Indication .................... 5-10
6. Specifications ........................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 Performance and Specifications..................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1 Power Supply ..................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.2 Input Signal ........................................................................................ 6-1
6.1.3 Output Signal ..................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.4 Setting Time and Accuracy ................................................................ 6-2
6.1.5 Environmental Specifications (Normal Operating Conditions) .......... 6-2
6.1.6 External Input /Output Signal Specifications and Circuits ................. 6-3
6.2 Serial Input/Output Data Sentence ................................................................. 6-8
6.3 Setting Dip Switches ........................................................................................ 6-9
6.4 List of Initial Values ......................................................................................... 6-11
6.5 External Product View .................................................................................... 6-13
7. Maintenance, Inspection and Installation ............................................................7-1
7.1 Inspection .......................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.1 Daily Inspection.................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.2 Regular Maintenance......................................................................... 7-1
7.2 Maintenance of the Gyrosphere ...................................................................... 7-2
7.2.1 Precautions During Removal ............................................................. 7-2

iv
7.2.2 Removing the Gyrosphere................................................................. 7-3
7.2.3 Installing the Gyrosphere ................................................................... 7-8
7.2.4 Replacing the Fuse .......................................................................... 7-14
7.2.5 Confirmation of System Operation .................................................. 7-14
7.2.6 Preparation of Supporting Liquid ..................................................... 7-15
7.3 Precautions During Installation .................................................................... 7-16
7.3.1 Vibration Measures .......................................................................... 7-16
7.3.2 Parallelism of Lubber’s Lines ........................................................... 7-16
7.3.3 Service Area ..................................................................................... 7-16
Appendix-1 Description of Speed Error and Speed Error Table....................A-1
1.1 Speed Error....................................................................................................... A-1
1.2 Determining Speed Error ................................................................................ A-1
Appendix-2 Principle of Gyrocompass ............................................................A-5
2.1 Gyro ................................................................................................................... A-5
2.2 North-seeking Tendency of Gyrocompass ................................................... A-6
2.3 Gyrocompass Errors ....................................................................................... A-7
2.3.1 Speed Error ........................................................................................A-7
2.3.2 Acceleration Error ..............................................................................A-7
2.3.3 Rolling and Pitching Error ..................................................................A-7
Appendix-3 Block Diagram ................................................................................A-8
Appendix-4 Components List ..........................................................................A-37
4.1 Master Compass ............................................................................................ A-37
(1) MKM026-1,4 ....................................................................................A-37
(2) MKM026-2,3 ...................................................................................A-39
4.2 Control Box..................................................................................................... A-40
(1) MKC327-F,W ...................................................................................A-40
(2) MKC327-S .......................................................................................A-41
4.3 Repeater Compass (MKR050) ...................................................................... A-42
4.4 Junction Box (MKN019) ................................................................................ A-43
4.5 Steering Repeater Compass (MKR056)....................................................... A-44
4.6 AC Adapter (MKS066) .................................................................................... A-45
4.7 Dual AC Adapter (MKS071) ........................................................................... A-46
4.8 Junction Unit (MKN018) ............................................................................... A-47
4.9 C.Operation Unit (MKR040).......................................................................... A-48
Appendix-5 Serial Signal Format ....................................................................A-49
5.1 Basic Format ................................................................................................. A-49
5.2 Existing Format .............................................................................................. A-50
5.3 Heading Output for Repeater compass....................................................... A-55

< Foreword > v
Foreword
Thank you for purchasing the Yokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd. CMZ900 Gyrocompass.
This manual describes the functions, operating procedures, and the handling precautions
of the CMZ900 Gyrocompass. To ensure correct use, please read this manual thoroughly
before beginning operation.
 About this manual

• This manual should be read by the end user.
• Read this manual thoroughly and have a clear understanding of the product before operation.
• After you have finished reading this User’s Manual, be sure to keep it at your side.
• This manual explains the functions of the product. Yokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd. does not
guarantee that the product will suit a particular purpose of the user.
• Copying or reproducing all or any part of the contents of this manual without the permission of
Yokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd. is strictly prohibited.
• The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
• Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its
contents. However, should you have any questions or find any errors, please contact your
nearest Yokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd. dealer.
 Trademarks
• All the brands or names of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd.’s products used in this manual are
either trademarks or registered trademarks of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd..
• For purposes of this manual, the TM and ® symbols do not accompany their respective trade-
mark names or registered trademark names.
• Company and product names that appear in this manual are trademarks or registered trade-
marks of their respective holders.
 Safety precautions
 Notes about environmental condition for using

To use the CMZ900 Gyrocompass, keep the environment that satisfies “Specification” and “Equip-
ment condition” of this product.
See chapter 6 about specification of this products. And see section 7.3 about precautions during
installation. The details of precautions during installation is described in approval drawing.
 Notes about installation

• To install this products , follow the “Notes for installation” of approval drawing.
• If reinstallation will be needed , contact your nearest service agent of Yokogawa Denshikiki
Co., Ltd..
 Notes about preparation before using

Read this manual thoroughly and have a clear understanding of the product before operation.

vi < Foreword >
 Notes about using other than usage

This products are designed for gyrocompass for vessel. Do not use for other purpose.
 Notes about maintenance and inspection

• Regular inspection is recommended to keep this system good condition.
• Do not detach the unit cover without the instruction of service engineer.
• Contact your nearest service agent when the inspection which is not permitted in this manu-
al is needed.
 Notes about abnormal circumstances

• When abnormal allophone or abnormal smell is generated from this product, turn off the
power supply. After then deal with referring to this manual chapter 5. If it is impossible to deal,
contact your nearest service agent of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd..
• Do not keep using the system , if dealing methods are unknown when the system is under
abnormal condition.
• Contact your nearest service or sales agent to repair the system.
• When there is some instruction about the method of trouble shooting from service department
of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. , obey the instructions and work.
 Notes about disposal of the products

When this product is scrapped , follow the regulations specified by each country.
A lithium battery is used in this product. Before disposing , insulate the both of terminals of lithium
battery with insulation tape. Dispose of the lithium battery as industrial waste following the regula-
tions.
 Notes about disposal of the used supporting liquid

• To dispose of used supporting liquid , please request processing to permitted industrial waste
disposal trader.
• Or contact your nearest service agent of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd..
 Precautions related to the protection, safety, and alteration of the product

• The following safety symbols are used on the product and in this manual.
"Handle with care." To avoid injury and damage to the instrument,

the operator must refer to the explanation in the manual.
“Risk of Electric Shock”
Protective ground terminal
AC
"High temperature." To avoid injury caused by hot surface, do not

touch locations where this symbol appears.

< Foreword > vii
• For the protection and safe use of the product and the system controlled by it, be sure to follow
the instructions and precautions on safety that are stated in this manual whenever you handle
the product. Take special note that if you handle the product in a manner that violate these
instructions, the protection functionality of the product may be damaged or impaired. In such
cases, Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. does not guarantee the quality, performance, function,
and safety of the product.
• When installing protection and/or safety circuits such as lightning protection devices and equip-
ment for the product and control system or designing or installing separate protection and/or
safety circuits for fool-proof design and fail-safe design of the processes and lines that use the
product and the control system, the user should implement these using additional devices and
equipment.
• If you are replacing parts or consumable items of the product, make sure to use parts specified
by Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd..
• Do not modify this product without instruction from service engineer of Yokogawa Denshikiki
Co., Ltd. .
 Exemption from responsibility

• Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. makes no warranties regarding the product except those
stated in the WARRANTY that is provided separately.
• Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. assumes no liability to any party for any loss or damage, direct
or indirect, caused by the user or any unpredictable defect of the product.
 How to use this manual

The following markings are used in this manual.
Improper handling or use can lead to injury to the user or damage to the instrument.
This symbol appears on the instrument to indicate that the user must refer to the
user’s manual for special instructions. The same symbol appears in the correspond-
ing place in the user’s manual to identify those instructions. In the manual, the
symbol is used in conjunction with the word “WARNING” or “CAUTION.”
WARNING
Calls attention to actions or conditions that could cause serious or fatal injury to the user, and pre-
cautions that can be taken to prevent such occurrences.
CAUTION
Calls attentions to actions or conditions that could cause light injury to the user or damage to the
instrument or user’s data, and precautions that can be taken to prevent such occurrences.
NOTE
Calls attention to information that is important for proper operation of the instrument.

viii < Foreword >
 Important Cautions
WARNING
Risk of Electric Shock
Turn off the power before carrying out any wiring.
CAUTION
Do not perform an insulation resistance test using a megohmmeter except on the ship’s power
terminals. Performing such a test may cause a failure in the gyro system.
Precautions in handling the gyrosphere
• Hold the gyrosphere firmly with both hands so as not to subject it to any shock.
• Do not drop the gyrosphere. Dropping the gyrosphere may result in damage to the internal
mechanism or lead to personal injury.
• Do not disassemble the gyrosphere.
Precautions in handling the container
• Hold the container firmly with both hands.
• Do not drop it. Dropping the gyrosphere may result in damage to the internal mechanism or
lead to personal injury.
Polishing of the slip ring is prohibited
• Carry out cleaning by wiping dirt off the slip ring with ethyl alcohol or ligroin.
 About the replacement parts for repair

• After discontinuation of production, the possession period of the replacement parts is ten
years.
• The replacement parts for repair are the parts necessary to maintain the function of this prod-
uct.

< Foreword > ix
 Handling precautions
 Startup of gyrocompass
(1) Startup the gyrocompass at least 5 hours before the ship’s departure.
(2) After startup, do not touch the internal unit of the Master compass. Otherwise the equipment
may be damaged or an error generated.
 Handling in cold districts

Since the Master compass container containing the gyrocompass is filled with liquid, if a gyrocom-
pass is to be stopped in a cold district where the ambient temperature is -3°C or less it should
therefore be handled as shown below.
(1) In the case where it is stopped for a period of a few days or less:
Wrap the Master compass in a blanket or the like to provide heat insulation.
(2) In the case of a prolonged stopping period (a week or more):
Drain the liquid completely.
 External heading out put

External heading can use with the Master compass′s signal driver circuits.
Turn on the main power of the Master compass (MKM026) in case of using external heading.
NOTE
The external heading sensor is optional unit. If the external heading sensor is not installed or con-
nected to gyrocompass, external heading signal can not be used.
 Heading changeover
Normally the heading signal is switched from other gyrocompass or external heading signal with
operating key on the C.operation unit. In the following condition, it is not possible to switch.
· Master compass is standing by to start.
· The other sensor which is scheduled to switch is abnormal.
· Exchanging the signal is prohibited.
CAUTION
Please execute the switch of heading signal between gyrocompass and external sensor in the
safety area.
NOTE
When external heading signal is used at other systems of RADAR , ECDIS or etc. , the signal format
should be fit for other system.

x < Foreword >
 G1/G2 gyro select switch on the changeover unit

The G1/G2 gyro select switch in control box should not be switched excluding the emergency
(ex. Failure of C.operation unit). Normally use the G1/G2 changeover switch in “NOR” position.
If the G1/G2 changeover switch is used in excluding “NOR” position, the following phenomenon
will occur.
(1) An alarm is generated and unable to change heading signal
The switch alarm (error code : 130) will occur. And even if gyro heading selection key or ex-
ternal heading selection key is pushed, it is unable to change azimuth signal.
(2) The stepper signals become asynchronously
Because the stepper signals of two Mastercompass become asynchronously, the heading of
the device which is using stepper signal will become disagreement.
 Action method to heading changeover failure

Refer to section 4.5.2(2) when the heading changeover with an operation unit becomes impossible.

< 1.Overview > 1-1
1. Overview
The CMZ900 Gyrocompass fully conforms to the technical requirements of the IMO resolu-
tion A.424 (XI), gyrocompass performance standards, as well as to JIS F9602, standards.
The anti-vibration structure has been strengthened and improvement of the follow-up per-
formance has been achieved, leading to increased rigidity of the gyrocompass in all types
of ships, from small to large.
1.1 Features of CMZ900

 High north-seeking accuracy
High north-seeking accuracy is achieved because of the following configuration: The gyrosphere,
the heart of the gyrocompass, is supported in a container filled with liquid, which prevents distur-
bance from affecting the center pin. In addition, two gyro-rotors rotate at a high speed and work
with each other to cancel out errors due to the rolling, pitching and yawing of a ship.
 Excellent vibration resistance and shock resistance

A unique anti-vibration mechanism enhanced by the velocity damping effect of high viscous oil,
provides superior damping of vibration and decoupling of shock at sea.
 Improvement of follow-up performance

The container size is more reduced and it is realized more stabilized follow-up performance has
been achieved.
 Digitalization of Master compass heading

The master compass heading is displayed with digital numbers. It offers easy reading of the
heading.
 Automatic speed-error correcting function

Speed-error is corrected automatically by entering the ship’s speed signal and latitude signal re-
spectively from the Log and GPS or the like. The amount of latitude change in the case where there
is no latitude signal input is estimated from a calculation of the ship’s speed and heading. In a B-
Type system, this function is implemented in the remote unit.
 Functions for various displays and settings

Various types of gyrocompass information can be displayed and set on the Master compass op-
eration unit and remote unit.
 Preparation of outputs corresponding to every requirement

In addition to the digital heading signal output for the Repeater compass, the stepper heading
signal output, digital signal output (IEC61162-1/-2), analog heading, quadrant, and angular turning
velocity signal output are equipped as standard.
 Onboard battery drive

Compass running by the onboard battery is available as standard.

1-2 < 1.Overview >
 Built-in startup timer

The restart time of the timer can be set from 1 to 99 hours.
 Heading output using external azimuth sensor signal

Using the heading signal from the external heading sensor (GPS compass, magnet compass, etc.)
signals can be output to external connecting device such as Repeater compasses or a radar.
 Dynamic speed error correction(Option)

In high latitude (up to 75 degrees), even when a speed error revised value changes with increase
and decrease, revolution, etc. of speed rapidly, a direction signal is outputted in the accuracy based
on the IMO standard.
NOTE
This function needs the Master compass which is written in CD065A15 or later software.
 Correspondence to DNV NAUTICAL SAFTY(rule in July 2010:option)

(1) Equip a serial interface function with BAMS(bridge alarm management system).
It is possible for this to perform the generating situation check of the alarm which occurred with
the gyrocompass, and a buzzer stop on the screen of BAMS.
(2) Equip two independent positioning equipment interfaces.
It is possible to carry out a change to normal positioning equipment automatically by this, even
if one piece of positioning equipment break down, and to make influence on speed error correc-
tion into the minimum.
(3) Carry out the change at the time of an automatic direction change to the change speed of 0.2
deg/s.
It is possible to minimize the amount of steering of an auto pilot by this, even when the master
compass under selection breaks down.
(4) Output the perfect status of a gyrocompass.
Thereby, grasp of the apparatus of a connection place is attained in the state of a gyrocompass,
and the safety of a ship increases.
NOTE
This function needs both the Master compass which is written in CD065A15 or later software, and
the C.operation unit which is written in CD066A20 or later software.

< 1.Overview > 1-3
1.2 Gyrocompass System

The CMZ900 Gyrocompass determine the ship’s heading using gyrosphere which is included in
Master compass.
The heading signal is displayed on operation unit, and is output to Repeater compass or external
units.
If any system failure will be occurred, the buzzer will sounds and the FAIL LED will blink.
The gyrocompass system is composed of the following units.
 Master compass
The Master compass is detect ship’s heading and calculate rate of turn.
These signals are output to any units. The M.operation unit is included in this Master compass.
 Repeater compass / Steering repeater compass

The Repeater compass is receive serial heading signal from Master compass, and indicates ship’s
heading.
 Control box
The Control box is connected to Master compass and other external device. This unit drives each
heading signals. This unit is used with D-Type.
 Operation unit
The operation unit is used to control gyrocompass. There are two kinds of operation units. One is
C.operation unit and the other is M. Operation Unit. C.operation unit is standard device in Type-S /
D and optional device in Type-B.
See chapter 2. for detail of system construction.

1-4 < 1.Overview >
1.3 Device Composition Type

CMZ900 has 3 type systems. Each systems has different composition and specification. The sys-
tem composition is described in chapter 2.
 CMZ900B (Not explain in this manual)

B-Type is composed of master compass, repeater compass and steering repeater compass. This
type is used with a medium ship by a small ship.
The automatic speed error correction is achieved using C. operation unit (option) and Junction unit
(option). The backup of power supply is achieved using AC adapter (option).
 CMZ900S (Not explain in this manual)

S-Type is composed of master compass, control box, repeater compass and steering repeater
compass. This type is used with a large ship by a medium ship. This type equips control box nor-
mally and can execute the functions which are optional functions for CMZ900B. This type has many
signal distribution drivers for external units.
 CMZ900D
D-Type is composed of two master compasses, control box, dual AC adapter, repeater compasses,
steering repeater compass. This type is used with a large ship by a medium ship. This system al-
ways observes errors by using the heading signal comparison data. If some error occurs on the
system, it is possible to exchange heading signal from the one hand to the other hand by operat-
ing the C. operation unit (software) or selector switch (hardware).
This changeover function improves the reliability of the system.

< 1.Overview > 1-5
1.4 Connection with External Devices

CMZ900 Gyrocompass has speed error correction using ship’s speed and position signal from
external devices. The heading signal or external input signal is output to external devices such as
Autopilot, Radar, Course Recorder and more.
1.4.1 Input Signal

The following signals can be input from external devices to gyrocompass.
Input signal External devices Signal format

Ship’s speed signal E.M.Log, Doppler Log, GPS, etc. IEC61162-1 Serial , Pulse
Latitude signal GPS, etc. IEC61162-1 Serial
Heading / Rate of turn signal Magnet compass , GPS compass, etc. IEC61162-1 Serial
The setting of serial signal format is possible according to the generation command.
See chapter 6 for specification of signal input.
See chapter 4 to set signal format using generation command.
In the case of the ship which apply DNV NAUTICAL SAFTY(rule in July 2010), the signal of speed
and latitude needs to input from two independent pieces of positioning equipment.
1.4.2 Output Signal

The following signals can be output to external devices from gyrocompass.
Output signal External devices Signal format

Repeater compass heading signal Repeater compass YOKOGAWA Original
Stepper heading signal Radar, etc. 3Bit gray code
Serial heading / Rate of turn signal Autopilot, Universal data display, etc. IEC61162-1 Serial
Analog heading / Rate of turn signal Course recorder, ROT Indicator, etc. Analog (0 to 5V)
The setting of serial signal format is possible according to the generation command.
See chapter 6 for specification of signal input.
See chapter 4 to set signal format using generation command.

1-6 < 1.Overview >
1.5 Outline of Operation

This section describes the operation of gyrocompass.
1.5.1 Startup and Stoppage

The gyrocompass starts when the main power supply is turned on.
The Master compass starts North-seeking. The Repeater compasses receive heading signal and
start display.
The gyrocompass settles within 5 hours, and displays true heading.
The gyrocompass stops when the main power supply is turned off.
The detail of startup is described in section 3.1.
1.5.2 Operation Unit

The gyrocompass is operated with the operation unit. Operation unit displays heading and the in-
formation. And it is used for setting the gyrocompass. There are two kinds of operation units. One
is C.operation Unit and the other is M.operation unit. C.operation unit is standard device in Type-
S/D and optional device in Type-B.
See section 3.2 for details of function and operation of operation unit.
Control box
GYROCOMPASS OPERATION UNIT

FAIL
SELECT
GYRO1 BZ STOP
GYRO2
EXT
GYRO1 GYRO2 EXT COMMAND ENT
DIMMER / LAMP TEST
C.operation unit
YOKOGAWA
Master compass
RUN
EXT
FAIL GYRO HEADING
EXT
COMMAND DATA
SHIFT UP COMMAND
ENT
▼ ▲ BZ STOP
SET/DIMMER
M.operation unit

< 1.Overview > 1-7
1.5.3 Normal Display

The gyrocompass become to “Normal Mode” through the “Standby status” at startup.
The operation unit displays the heading and status like at the standby.
See section 3.3 for details of displays in “Normal Mode”.
 Normal display on C.operation unit

The heading and system status are displayed on screen.
The example of a display when having inputted speed and latitude manually is shown in the follow-
ing figure.
Heading display
GYRO 1 >123.4 SPD.MANUAL Input method
GYRO 2 123.4 +00[kn]

EXT 126.0 LAT.MANUAL
System status display STBY N 00[°]
Input value
When the input of latitude and speed is performing the automatic input, the example of a display(ship
which does not apply DNV NAUTICAL SAFTY(rule in July 2010) is shown in the next figure.
Heading display
GYRO 1 >123.4 SPD.AUTO Input method
GYRO 2 123.4 +00[kn]

EXT 126.0 LAT.AUTO
Input value
When the input of latitude and speed is performing the automatic input, the example of a display(ship
which apply DNV NAUTICAL SAFTY(rule in July 2010) is shown in the next figure.
Heading display
GYRO 1 >123.4 SPD.AUTO 1 Input method and

selected GPS channel
GYRO 2 123.4 +00[kn]
EXT 126.0 LAT.AUTO 1
Input value

1-8 < 1.Overview >
 Normal display on M.operation unit

The heading is displayed on the heading display.
(The displayed heading is not corrected speed error. So the displayed heading on M.operation unit
might be different from the heading on C.operation unit or Repeater compass while the ship is
navigating.)
YOKOGAWA
Yokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd
Heading display
RUN
EXT
FAIL GYRO HEADING
EXT
COMMAND DATA
SHIFT UP COMMAND
BZ STOP
ENT
SET/ DIMMER

< 1.Overview > 1-9
1.5.4 Output Heading Selection

CMZ900D is composed of two Master compasses. If some error occurs on the system, it is possible
to exchange heading signal between No.1 Gyrocompass and No.2 Gyrocompass.
And If external heading signal is input, gyro compass can select it. If master compass is damaged
seriously, all output signals can be output by using the external signal.
To select the heading, press the heading selection key.
1.5.5 Command Function

The command for the setting is prepared in CMZ900.
Call-up code for various data display/setting in the CMZ900 Gyrocompass are assigned to the
predetermined numbers (command code). Calling the command code, it is possible to achieve
various function.
Move to command mode from normal mode to use command function.
See section 3.4 for detail of command function.
 List of Command Function
Operation Execu-
Clas-
Command unit tion
sifi- Function item Page
code during
cation
standby
C M
○ ○ Compass heading display
Display Function
○ 3-10
○ – True heading and system status display
True heading and value of speed error correction dis-
10 ○ –
play
○ 4-2
11 ○ – Heading deviation display ○ 4-3

12 ○ – Turn rate display ○ 4-4
○ ○ Gyro sphere running time display
13 ○ 4-5
○ – Total running time and the time after startup display
14 ○ – Dimmer rank display ○ 4-6
15 ○ ○ Gyro-sphere phase current display ○ 4-7
16 ○ ○ Backup battery voltage display ○ 4-8
17 ○ – Deviation voltage display ○ 4-9
19 ○ ○ Software version number display ○ 4-10
20 ○ – External heading input selection ○ 4-14
Setting Function
21 ○ ○ Speed setting for speed error correction ○ 4-15

22 ○ ○ Latitude setting for speed error correction ○ 4-16
23 ○ ○ Automatic alignment of Master compass × 4-17
24 ○ ○ Manual alignment of Master compass × 4-21
25 ○ ○ Setting the Master compass follow-up gain ○ 4-23
Displaying/resetting cause of Master compass
26 ○ ○ alarm
○ 4-24
27 ○ – Displaying/resetting cause of C.operation unit alarm ○ 4-25

28 ○ – Deviation alarm setting ○ 4-26
29 ○ – Startup timer setting ○ 4-27

1-10 < 1.Overview >
Operation Execu-
Clas-
Command unit tion
sifi- Function item Page
code during
cation
standby
C M
30 ○ ○ Permission for maintenance function ○ 4-34
Maintenance Function
31 ○ ○ Outputting simulated DAC signals × 4-35

32 ○ ○ Manual drive of Master compass ○ 4-37
33 ○ ○ Manual drive of Repeater compass ○ 4-38
34 ○ ○ Resetting gyrosphere running time ○ 4-39
35 ○ ○ Resetting logged data ○ 4-40
36 ○ ○ Initialization of backup memory ○ 4-41
37 ○ ○ Correcting Master compass installation error ○ 4-42
39 ○ ○ Displaying logged data ○ 4-45
40 ○ ○ Permission for generation function ○ 4-57
Generation Function
41 ○ ○ Setting the follow-up speed for stepper signal ○ 4-58

42 ○ – Setting communication protocol of output port ○ 4-59
43 ○ – Setting format of output port ○ 4-60
45 ○ – Setting format of input port ○ 4-65
49 ○ – Miscellaneous functions ○ 4-72
○ : Means that execution is permitted

× : Means that execution is not permitted
– : Means that the function is not Implemented.

< 1.Overview > 1-11
1.6 Outline of Alarm

If abnormal condition occurs on gyrocompass, an alarm is generated.
1.6.1 The Display When Alarm is Generated

When an alarm is generated, the buzzer sounds and the alarm LED blinks.
The error code and the cause of the alarm are displayed on the screen of C.operation unit.
GYRO 1 ---.- GYRO FAILED!

GYRO 2 123.4 G1:CODE= 010
EXT >126.0 Gyro current
HDG FLT excess
The error message disappears by pushing the command key.
1.6.2 Buzzer Stop

Pressing the buzzer-stop key stops the buzzer.
1.6.3 Confirmation of Alarm Causes

The alarm LED goes out if the alarm is reset, but continues to light up if the alarm continues.
The check procedure when the alarm is generated is described to Chapter 5.

1-12 < 1.Overview >
1.7 Maintenance and Inspection

Implement the following procedures of the daily inspection and regular inspection to main-
tain the gyrocompass in a state of normal working order:
1.7.1 Daily Inspection

The inspection items are as follows.
Recommended
Inspection Item Inspection Contents and Procedure
Inspection Interval
Gyrosphere drive current Check that the current is within the range 0.15 A
Once/day
1 to 0.35 A by executing the command code “15”.
(at an arrival)
(See section 4.1.6)
Repeater compass align- Check that the heading of each Repeater com-
2 Once/departure
ment pass agrees with that of the Master compass.(*1)
Ship’s speed value Latitude Check that there are no errors in ship’s speed
3 and latitude by executing the command codes Once/day
“21” and “22”. (See section 4.2.2 and 4.2.3)
Azimuth error Check that there is no azimuth error using astro-
4 Once/day
nomical or physical target observation.
Deviation alarm setting Check that each deviation alarm threshold value
5 Once/departure
is a suitable value. (*2)(See section 4.2.9)
DC Battery input Check that the DC input voltage of AC Adapter
(MKS066/MKS071) are regulated voltage.
6 Once/year
MKS066 : TB1 3-4 and 23-24
MKS071 : TB1 3-4 and TB2 3-4
NOTE
*1: Check the readings of the Repeater compass card when the ship’s speed is set to “0”. If a
speed-error correction is performed, the Master compass card reading will not agree with the
Repeater compass card reading.
*2: Please set up a suitable heading deviation alarm threshold value according to the apparatus
connected. When a deviation alarm threshold value is 0.0 degree, the heading deviation alarm
does not occur.
1.7.2 Regular Inspection

Perform the following maintenance once a year.
NOTE
Order to the Service Department of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. for regular inspection.
Inspection Item Procedure

1 Gyrosphere Cleaning of the lower and band electrode .
Container Cleaning of inside surface ,center pin (Exercise care when handling.) ,
2
lower electrode ,band electrode, follow-up electrode.
3 Supporting Liquid Replacement of supporting liquid
4 Air filter Cleaning of the air filter. (Replace the air filter when remarkably dirty.)

< 1.Overview > 1-13
1.8 Definition of Terms

This section describes the definition of terms used in this manual.
Compass heading The heading detected by the master compass

The heading obtained by subtracting the value of the speed error
True heading
correction from the compass heading
Value of speed-error correction The error calculated from the ship’s heading, speed and latitude
A heading output to external connected device (such as repeater
compasses).
Output heading
Either the gyro heading or external sensor heading should be
selected.
Gyro heading True heading
A heading to be input from external heading sensors (such as
External sensor heading
magnet compass/GPS compass and the like)

Blank Page
< 2.Hardware > 2-1
2. Hardware
2.1 Component Models
CMZ900D are composed following units. The units are selected for the usage.
 CMZ900D System Configuration
AC Adapter
(MKS066/MKS071)
No.1 Power Supply (100 to 220 V AC , 50/60 Hz) No.2 Power Supply (100 to 220 V AC , 50/60 Hz)
No.1 Power Supply (24V DC) No.2 Power Supply (24V DC)
24 V DC Power Supply
Master Compass Control Box Master Compass

(MKM026) (MKC327) (MKM026)
C.operation
Unit
(MKR040)
Serial Signal for Repeater Compass Analog (0V to 5V)
Repeater Compass Sterring Repeater Compass Course Recorder Rate of Turn

(MKR050) (MKR056) (MKR101A/181A) (MKR302/MHR130)
INMARSAT
RADAR
GPS
Stepper Signal .
Horizontal Bracket Tilting Bracket Horizontal Stand .
(KX201A) (KX213) (KX223A) .
etc
AUTO PILOT
Serial Signal IBS
(IEC 1162-1) INS
.
Connection Box .
(MKN019) .
etc
(Device to be connected)

2-2 < 2.Hardware >
 Component Models
Master compass Stand Alone type Gyrosphere

MKM026-1 MKT007
Switch Unit
MKR026
Gyro compass
M.Operation Unit
CMZ 900D
MKR025
Pilot stand type

MKM026- 3
M.Operation Unit
MKR025
Console type
MKM026-4
Switch Unit
MKR026
M.Operation Unit
MKR025
Control box Flush mount type

MKC327-F
Pilot stand type

MKC327-S
Wall mount type

MKC327-W
C.Operation Unit
MKR040
Repeater compass Gland type Horizontal stand

MKR050-G KX223A
Connection
Steering box Horizontal bracket
Repeater compass MKN019-G KX201A
MKR056
Tilting bracket
KX213
AC Adapter Plug type Horizontal stand

MKS066/MKS071 MKR050-P KX223A
Connection
box Horizontal bracket
MKN019-P KX201A
Tilting bracket
KX213

< 2.Hardware > 2-3
2.2 Component Names and Functions

2.2.1 Master Compass [MKM026]
Master compass detects ship's heading.
 Master Compass Stand Alone Type

This master compass is stand alone type which includes components to exclusive case.
Switch unit
M.operation unit
Container with Gyrosphere
See section 3.2.2 for name of each part of M.operation unit and its functions.
 Pilot Stand type

This type includes gyro compass units into stand.
Autopilot Stand
C.operation Unit
M.operation Unit
Container with gyrosphere
Fuse
No.1 power switch
No.2 power switch
External output power switch
Gyro select switch
See section 3.2.1 for name of each part of C. operation unit and its functions.
 Console Type
This type is used to be included into ship's bridge console. This type master compass has plate and
rails for drawing it out.

2-4 < 2.Hardware >
2.2.2 Control Box [MKC327]

The Control box distributes heading signals and power to other units and receives signals from
other units. The Control box equips C.operation unit on the front cover and equips power switches
and terminals into the box.
Front
C.operation unit
Fuse

FAIL
BZ STOP
SELECT
Inside
GYRO1
GYRO2
EXT
No.1 Power switch
DIMMER / LAMP TEST
No.2 Power switch
External output
power switch
Gyro select switch
Terminal board
Front cover
The Control box has three kinds of structures which are wall mount type, flush mount type and
built-in Pilot stand type.
See section 3.2.1 for name of each part of C.operation unit and its functions.
2.2.3 AC Adapter [MKS066/MKS071]

This unit supplies DC power to master compass.
Front View
Front cover
Inside View
Fuse
Power switch
Power switch
Fuse
Terminal block
MKS066 MKS071

< 2.Hardware > 2-5
2.2.4 Repeater Compass [MKR050]

The repeater compass receives a heading signal from the master compass, indicates the true
heading.
Pointer
Scale (360 degrees/round)
Shadow pin mounting hole
Side View
Top view
Terminal lug
Connector
Horizontal stand
Horizontal bracket
Tilting bracket
Junction box
NOTE
If the heading of repeater compass has errors, check and adjust it referring to chapter 5.

2-6 < 2.Hardware >
2.2.5 Junction Box [MKN019]

This unit receives heading signal and power from Master compass and drives Repeater compass.
It is used to adjust dimmer.
Fail indicator LED (red)

This LED is lit or blinks when an error is detected.
Normally it is off.
Run indicator LED (green)

This LED blinks when zero adjustment is being carried out.
Normally it is lit.
Zero adjustment switch

Used when there has been a shift in the value indicated
by the Repeater compass.
Dimmer control
Turning this dial adjusts the illumination of the compass card,
and run indicator LED.
Gland or Connector
Connect to Repeater compass.
Gland
Connect to Master compass or control box.
2.2.6 Steering Repeater Compass [MKR056]
Pointer
Fail indicator LED
Run indicator LED FAIL

Dimmer control
RUN SYNC DIMMER Turning this dial adjusts
the illumination of the compass
Zero adjustment switch card, and run indicator LED.

< 3.Operation > 3-1
3. Operation
This chapter describes the operation of the CMZ900 Gyrocompass system.
3.1 Startup and Stoppage

NOTE
Startup the gyrocompass at least 5 hours before the ship's departure.
3.1.1 The Procedure of Startup and Stoppage

Confirm the presence of power supply for the system at startup.
 The operation on the Control box and Autopilot stand.

The gyrocompass is started up and stopped by operating the main power switch in the Control box
or Autopilot stand. The power switch is placed at right hand in the Control box or Autopilot stand.
For startup, locate the toggle switch to ON side. For stoppage, locate the toggle switch to OFF
side.
Inside of the control box
No.1 Power switch
No.2 Power switch
External output
power switch
Inside of the Autopilot stand
No.1 power switch
No.2 power switch
External output
power switch

3-2 < 3.Operation >
3.1.2 Startup Sequence

The following processes are passed until gyro sphere is stabilized and true heading is output.
Power On
(Main switch is turned on)
about 20 minutes Supplied power to system, and the

rotator in gyrosphere is started to
rotate.
Repeater compass power ON

Stepper ROT power ON
about 1 minute Zero adjustment of Repeater

compass
Zero adjustment of Master

compass
The Master compass starts zero

adjustment, when the phasecurrent
about 5 hours is lower than 0.35 A and the
revolution of rotator comes
constant.
the Master compass is followed

gyrosphere heading Output singal are started
The Repeater compass and

stepper signal heading followed
to Master compass heading
The gyrosphere heading is settled and the system

outputs true heading

< 3.Operation > 3-3
3.1.3 Hot Start and Cold Start

 Flow diagram
Turn on each of the ship's AC and DC

powersupplies for the gyrocompass system.
If AC power is not supplied to the

system, turn on DC power only.
Turn on the main power switch.
Revolution of the gyro-sphere rotor is high. Revolution of the gyro-shere rotor is low.
→Phase current is higher than 0.35A →Phase current is 0.35A or less
Cold start Hot start

System status :"STBY" The gyrocompass enters
The follow-up operation of the normal operationg status
Master compass stops. immediately.
Aligning operation is prohibited.
Phase current decreases blow
0.35A and when its rate-of-change
becomes low, the compass enters
nomal operating status.
Normal status System status : blank
Start up the gyrocompass at least 5 hours before performing normal operation.

After the power switch is turned on, the gyrocompass system is started up at either hot start or cold
start depending on the condition of the gyro-sphere.
If the gyro rotor is rotating at a high enough speed to detect the heading, hot start begins, however,
if it is rotating at a speed that is too low to detect the heading, cold start begins.
The rotating status of the gyro rotor is determined by monitoring the phase current.

3-4 < 3.Operation >
 Hot start
Hot start begins if the value of the phase current immediately after turning on the power is 0.35 A
or less and follow-up of Master compass, signal input/output, and indicator LEDs are normal.
Phase curent
Normal
Time
 Cold start
Cold start begins if the value of the phase current immediately after turning on the power is higher
than 0.35 A. The stand-by state continues until the phase current drops and the rate of change in
the phase current drops below a specified level. Normal operation will start when these requirements
are met. During stand-by, functions of Master compass automatic aligning and manual aligning
cannot be carried out. After about 2 hours, the heading becomes to practical and gyrocompass is
ready for operation.
Phase curent
STAND-BY Normal
Time

< 3.Operation > 3-5
3.2 Operation Unit

The gyrocompass is operated with the operation unit. Operation unit displays heading and the in-
formation. And it is used for setting the gyrocompass. There are two kinds of operation units. One
is C.operation Unit and the other is M.operation unit.
 C.operation unit
The C.operation unit is equipped on the front door of Control box or Autopilot stand. The operation
unit is used for operating the Master compass and setting the communication port to connect with
the external devices. It is possible to shift operation right to M.operation unit.
Control box

FAIL
SELECT
GYRO1 BZ STOP
GYRO2
EXT
DIMMER / LAMP TEST
C.operation unit
 M.operation unit
The M.operation unit is equipped on the front panel of Master compass (Stand alone type / Console
type). The M.operation unit is used for operating the Master compass which is connected with.
Some commands can not be operated with M.operation unit. (Refer to section 3.4.2)
YOKOGAWA
Master compass
RUN
EXT
FAIL GYRO HEADING
EXT
COMMAND DATA
SHIFT UP COMMAND
ENT
▼ ▲ BZ STOP
SET/DIMMER
M.operation unit

3-6 < 3.Operation >
 The operation mode of operation unit

The operation units have two mode. The one mode is used for displaying the azimuth data and
system status. This mode is named "Normal mode".
The other mode is used for displaying the detail information and setting the system. This mode is
named "Command mode".
Press Command Mode

COMMAND key
Executing the command
• Display functions
• Setting functions
COMMAND • Maintenance functions
Normal Mode • Generation functions
• Displaying the heading (C.operation Unit)
• Displaying the system status
• Displaying the data to use
COMMAND
speed error correction
(C.operation unit) BZ STOP
(M.operation Unit)
Press
COMMAND key
3.2.1 The Name of Each Part of C.Operation Unit and Its

Functions
This section describes the name of each part of C.operation unit and its functions.
 The name of each part
Heading display area Data display area Alarm LED and Select LED and
Buzzer stop key select key

FAIL
SELECT
GYRO1 BZ STOP
GYRO2
EXT
Arrow keys
DIMMER / LAMP TEST
Gyro heading Dimmer key

selection key
External heading Command key ENT key
selection key

< 3.Operation > 3-7
 The function of each part

 Heading display
Displays a compass heading and system status.
 Data display
Indicates displays corresponding to menus and each command code.
 Alarm LED and buzzer stop key

Displays alarm statuses for the gyrocompass system.
If pressed when an alarm is generated, the alarm buzzer is stopped.
 Select LED and Select key

Displays and selects the operating initiative (C.operation unit or M.operation unit). keep the
key pressed for at least two seconds.
When LED is lit, this unit can be operated.
When LED goes off, M.operation unit can be operated.
 Arrow key
Carry out selection of commands and data and switching of displays.
 ENT key
Enters and sets commands and data.
COMMAND key
If pressed when in normal mode, the display switches from the data display to the MAIN
MENU.
If pressed when the display is in access mode, the display returns to normal mode.
Dimmer key
Adjusts brightness of the displays of this unit.
In addition, if this key is pressed in combination with the ENT key, contrast of the LCD can be
adjusted.
If both keys are simultaneously pressed, a lamp test is performed.
External heading selection key

Changes the output heading to that of the external heading (bow heading input from external
heading sensor). keep the key pressed for at least two seconds.
Gyro heading selection key

If GYRO1 key is pressed, the output heading is changed to the gyro heading (true heading of
the No.1 master compass).
If GYRO2 key is pressed, the output heading is changed to the gyro heading (true heading of
the No.2 master compass).
keep the key pressed for at least two seconds.
If key ,  or  is to be operated, keep the key pressed for at least two seconds.
NOTE
The back-light of external heading selection key is not lit on system that the external-input is not
available.

3-8 < 3.Operation >
3.2.2 The Name of Each Part of M.Operation Unit and Its

Functions
This section describes the name of each part of M.operation unit and its functions.
NOTE
If the C.operation unit has operation rights ,the M.operation unit can not be operated. To operate
the M.operation unit, press the selection key on the C.operation unit and turn off the selection
LED.
 The name of each part

FAIL indicator LED EXT indicator LED RUN indicator LED Command code display area
YOKOGAWA
Yokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd.
Gyro heading
display area
RUN
ON EXT
FAIL GYRO HEADING
Data display
EXT area
COMMAND DATA
SHIFT UP COMMAND
OFF ENT
▼ ▲ BZ STOP
ENT key
POWER
SET/DIMMER
GYROCOMPASS
Power switch External heading Set/Dimmer key Command/

selector switch Buzzer stop key
 The function of each part
 Power switch
Turns on/off the power to the gyro system.
 External heading selector switch

If the switch is kept pressed for 2 seconds or more when in normal mode, the output heading
(gyro heading/external heading) is selected.
When the C.operation unit is used, this switch isn’t used.
 Set/dimmer key
In normal mode these are dimmer keys that adjust the level of brightness of all displays on the
M.operation unit. The displays can be darkened by pressing the ▼ key and brightened by
pressing the ▲ key. Brightness can be adjusted in 32 steps.
If two keys are simultaneously pressed, a lamp test is performed.
If the key is pressed in command selection mode or command execution mode, data is input.
Pressing the SHIFT key changes the input digit (blinks) while pressing the UP key changes
the numeric value in the input digit.

< 3.Operation > 3-9
 Command/buzzer stop key

If this key is pressed in normal mode, the mode changes to the command selection mode, and
if pressed in command selection mode or command execution mode, the mode returns to
normal.
If pressed when an alarm is generated, the alarm buzzer and blinking of the FAIL indicator
LED stops.
 ENT key
Enters an input value in command selection mode or command execution mode. To carry out
operations with this key switch, keep it pressed for 2 seconds.
 Data display area
Displays/sets data when a command is executed.
 Gyro heading display area

Displays a compass heading.
 Command code display area

Displays a command code.
 RUN indicator LED

Lights up when the power switch is turned “on.”
 EXT indicator LED

Goes out when the currently selected output heading is the gyro heading and lights up when
the output heading is the external sensor heading.

11 FAIL indicator LED
Blinks when an alarm is generated.

If the “BZ STOP” key is pressed, it lights up during an alarm and goes out when the alarm is
restored to normal.

3-10 < 3.Operation >
3.3 Display of Normal State

Displays of the operation unit at startup (normal state) will be described below.
 Displays of the C.operation unit at normal state

The heading display indicates true headings of each heading sensor and system status, and the
data display indicates input method and selected GPS channel and input value of ship’s speed and
ship’s position (the figure on the right is an example of this display).
Heading display
GYRO 1 >123.4 SPD.AUTO 1 Input method and

selected GPS channel
GYRO 2 123.4 +00[kn]
EXT 126.0 LAT.AUTO 1
Input value
 Heading display
The true heading of the No.1 master compass is displayed in the first line (GYRO 1), the true head-
ing of the No.2 master compass is displayed in the second line (GYRO 2) and the heading of ex-
ternal heading sensor is displayed in the third line (EXT) of the heading display.
The display is blank for heading values not connected to this C. operation unit.
The true heading whose heading value is ineffective is displayed with "- - - . - ". ( i.e. signal input error.)
For the heading sensor that is selected, ">" is displayed immediately before the heading.
To switch to another heading sensor, press the external heading selector key or the gyro heading
selector key (cannot be selected to an unconnected compass).
 System status display

The gyro system status is displayed in the bottom line of the heading display. The system status
at normal running is not shown and the display is blank.
System Status
STBY Displayed when No.1 and No.2 master compass is in stand-by status.
G1 STBY Displayed when No.1 master compass is in stand-by status.
G2 STBY Displayed when No.2 master compass is in stand-by status.
HDG FLT Displayed when there is a failure with the azimuth sensor that is selected.
Displayed when there is a failure of the No1 and No2 AC power supply to the system equipped
PWR FLT (*1) with the DC backup system. This indication is held even if an AC power supply recovers. In-
dication disappears when a COMMAND key is pushed.
Displayed when there is a failure of the No1 AC power supply to the system equipped with the
PWR1FLT (*1) DC backup system. This indication is held even if an AC power supply recovers. Indication
disappears when a COMMAND key is pushed.
Displayed when there is a failure of the No2 AC power supply to the system equipped with the
PWR2FLT (*1) DC backup system. This indication is held even if an AC power supply recovers. Indication
disappears when a COMMAND key is pushed.
C/O FLT Displayed when the automatic changeover is not possible.

< 3.Operation > 3-11
C/O PRF Displayed when the changeover operation is not permitted.

ALIGN Displayed during heading change over. (From gyrocompass to gyrocompass)
COP1FLT Displayed when the main power supply of changeover BD ASSY is abnormal.
COP2FLT Displayed when the sub power supply of changeover BD ASSY is abnormal.
MUTE Displayed when the mute function of alarm sound is enable.
*1: This indication is held even if an AC power supply recovers. Indication disappears when a COMMAND key is pushed.
 Input method
There are displayed the method of input for speed and latitude.
MANUAL The value is set manually.
The value is automatically inputted from an external sensor.(Ship which does not apply DNV
AUTO
NAUTICAL SAFTY (rule in July 2010))
A value is automatically inputted from a primary GPS sensor.(Ship which apply DNV NAUTI-
AUTO1
CAL SAFTY (rule in July 2010))
A value is automatically inputted from a secondary GPS sensor.(Ship which apply DNV NAU-
AUTO2
TICAL SAFTY (rule in July 2010))
 Input value
The values to correct the speed error is displayed.
 Displays of the M.operation unit at normal mode

 Heading display
YOKOGAWA
The gyro heading display shows a compass heading, in-

dications in the command and data displays disappear. RUN
EXT
FAIL GYRO HEADING
EXT
COMMAND DATA
SHIFT UP COMMAND
BZ STOP
ENT
SET/ DIMMER
 System status display

During standby the gyro heading dispaly indicates the
compass heading when the power was last turned off ,
and the data display indicates “C.S.” . YOKOGAWA
RUN
EXT
FAIL GYRO HEADING
EXT
COMMAND DATA
SHIFT UP COMMAND
BZ STOP ENT
SET/ DIMMER

3.4 Command Mode

This section describes the functions which are achieved in command mode and the procedures to
execute.
3.4.1 The Classification of Command Functions

The command functions are classified into following four types.
 The displaying function

The displaying function is used for displaying various information.
 The setting function

The setting function is used for setting and adjusting to using the gyro compass properly.
 The maintenance function

The maintenance function is used for maintaining and operation verification when the system is
rigged or regular inspection. This function is not used for normally. The system will request to input
password when this function is used.
 The generation function

The generation function is used for setting to connect external units.
This function is not used for normally. The system will request to input password when this function
is used.
See chapter 4 for the operation procedure of each functions.
Column:
Each functions are assigned individual command code. The command function is a generic
name of the function that can be achieved by operating these command codes.

3.4.2 Command Code List

This section shows the list of command codes assigned for each function.
Some functions can not be operated when gyrocompass is standing by.
See chapter 4 for the operation procedure of each functions.
NOTE
Some commands can not be operated with M.operation unit.
Refer to the following table for the executable commands on the M.operation unit.
 Command code list
Clas- Operation Execution

Command unit
sifi- Function item during Page
code
cation standby
C M
○ 3-10
10 ○ –
play
○ 4-2

Display Function

13 ○ 4-5
Setting Function

26 ○ ○ alarm
○ 4-24


Clas- Operation Execution

Command unit
sifi- Function item during Page
code
cation standby
C M
Maintenance Function

39 ○ ○ Displaying lodgged data ○ 4-45
Generation Function



3.4.3 Operation in the Command Mode

To execute the commands shift to “Command Mode”. This section describes about “Command
Mode”.
 Operation on C.operation unit

Press the command key to shift the “Command Mode”. After then an menu appears on the data
display area. The commands are executed by selecting the menu item.
Press the command key to return to the Normal Mode from the Command Mode.
 Accessing Menus
(1) Rough classification menu

If the command key is pressed when in normal
mode, the MAIN MENU appears in the data dis-
play (the figure on the right). GYRO 1 >123.4 MAIN MENU
The item that is selected blinks. (The blinking part GYRO 2 123.4 1 Display
is called the cursor.)
EXT 126.0 2 Operate
Select an item by moving the position of the cur-
sor with the up and down arrow keys. 3 Maintain
If the down arrow key is pressed when the cursor

resides in the bottom line, the displayed menu
GYRO 1 >123.4 MAIN MENU
shows the next page.
If the up arrow key is pressed when the cursor GYRO 2 123.4 2 Operate
resides in the top line, the displayed menu shows
EXT 126.0 3 Maintain
the preceding page.
To return to normal mode from the display thus 4 Generate
accessed, press the COMMAND key.
(2) Medium classification menu

Select “1 Display” from the MAIN MENU and GYRO 1 >123.4 DISP MENU
press the ENT key. The MAIN MENU switches
to the DISP MENU (as shown in the figure on GYRO 2 123.4 10 HDG
the right). EXT 126.0 11 DEV
12 ROT
Select “2 Operate” from the MAIN MENU and
press the ENT key. The MAIN MENU switches
to the Operat.MENU (as shown in the figure on
the right).
GYRO 1 >123.4 Operat.MENU
GYRO 2 123.4 20 EXT SEL
EXT 126.0 21 SPD SET
22 LAT SET

Select “3 Maintain” from the MAIN MENU GYRO 1 >123.4 Maint.MENU

and press the ENT key. The MAIN MENU
switches to the Maint.MENU (as shown in the GYRO 2 123.4 30 Password
figure on the right). EXT 126.0
GYRO 1 >123.4 Generat.MENU

Select “4 Generate” from the MAIN MENU and
press the ENT key. The MAIN MENU switches GYRO 2 123.4 40 Password
to the Generat.MENU (as shown in the figure
on the right). EXT 126.0
 Flow of accessing menus

SPD.MANUAL
Nomal +00[kn]
display LAT.MANUAL
N 00[°]
COMMAND
MAIN MENU MAIN MENU MAIN MENU MAIN MENU

Rough
1 Display 1 Display 1 Display 2 Operate
classification 2 Operate 2 Operate 2 Operate 3 Maintain
menu 3 Maintain 3 Maintain 3 Maintain 4 Generat
MAIN MENU MAIN MENU
2 Operate 2 Operate
3 Maintain 3 Maintain
4 Generat 4 Generat
ENT ENT ENT ENT
DISP MENU Operat.MENU Maint.MENU Generat.MENU

Medium
10 HDG 20 EXT SEL 30 Password 40 Password
classification 11 DEV 21 SPD SET
menu 12 ROT 22 LAT SET
Display menu Operation menu Maintenance menu Generation menu
ENT ENT ENT ENT
To external heading To password input for To password input for

To displaying heading
input selection maintenance mode generation mode

 Operation on M.operation unit

This paragraph describes the operation procedures on the M.operation unit.
Press the command key to shift the “Command Mode”.
Press the command key to return to the Normal Mode from the Command Mode.
 Operation flow
Press the command key to shift the “Command Mode”. After then the code number “00” appears
and blinks on the command code display area. Input the command code for executing the com-
mand. Press the ENT key 2 times each 2 seconds or more for command decision. (If command
code number is less than 20, press ENT key 1 time.)
(1) Normal mode COMMAND

BZ STOP
COMMAND DATA
COMMAND
BZ STOP
blinking
(2) Command
selection mode
COMMAND DATA
UP
The value of place of ten become "1".
SHIFT
The blinking move to place of one.
UP
The value of place of one become "5".
Push UP key 5 times.

blinking
(3) Command
excution mode
COMMAND DATA
ENT
Push ENT key 2 times each 2 seconds or more.
COMMAND DATA

3.4.4 The Procedure for Changing the Value

This section describes the procedure for changing the set value.
 The procedure on C.operation unit

The set value is changed using arrow keys on the C.operation unit. The set value is fixed by press-
ing ENT key.
 The item selection operation
I t e m 1 When is pressed, The previous item is selected.

Set Value I t e m 2
When is pressed, The next item is selected.
I t e m 3
I t e m 4
.
.
.
 The setting value input operation

When is pressed, The previous item is selected.
When is pressed, The cursor move to next place.

Set Value
When is pressed, The cursor move to previous pl
When is pressed, The next item is selected.
It is same procedure to input alphabet.
 The procedure on M.operation unit

The set value is changed using SHIFT and UP keys on the M.operation unit. The set value is fixed
by pressing ENT key.
 The item selection operation
00
Set Value
10
20 The next item is selected by every pressing the
UP
key.
30 00 10 20 ... 80 90
 The setting value input operation
0 When
SHIFT
is pressed, the blinking place moves to the next.
Set Value 1
2 The next value is selected by every pressing the UP
key.
3 0 1 2 ... 8 9

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method > 4-1
4. Function Explanation and operation

method
This chapter describes the functions of CMZ900D. The operation , the adjusting and the setting
methods of gyrocompass which are executed by using the commandfunctions are described in
section 4.1, 4.2, 4.3 and 4.4. The heading exchange functionis described in section 4.5. The mute
function of alarm sound is described in section 4.6.
Refer to the chapter 3 for the procedure of executing the command function. And execute these
operation with enough understanding.
4.1 Display Functions

This section describes how to display various information.
The following 9 items can be displayed.
Operation Execution
Command Unit Function Item during Page
Code Standby
C M
○ 3-10
10 ○ –
play
○ 4-2

13 ○ 4-5

Each functions are executed by operating of the C.operation unit or the M.operation unit.
See the section 3.2 for the operation unit.

See the section 3.4 for the command function.
See the section 3.4.4 for the value input method.

4-2 < 4.Function Explanation and operation method >
4.1.1 Displaying Heading

COMMAND CODE :10
This function displays the true heading , the compass heading, and the value of speed error
correction .
 Operation with the C.operation Unit

Selecting “10 HDG” from the DISP MENU and
pressing the ENT key switches to the display GYRO 1 >123.4 123.4°
showing the heading.
GYRO 2 123.4 123.4°
Each true heading, compass heading and speed EXT 126.0
error correction (only for master compasses)of
the No.1 master compass (GYRO1), No.2 mas- True HDG
ter compass (GYRO2), and external unit (EXT)
are displayed in the first,
Pressing the right and left arrow keys switches
the display between true heading, compass GYRO 1 >123.4 122.9°
heading and the value of speed error correc- GYRO 2 123.4 122.9°
tion.
The upper, middle and lower figure on the right EXT 126.0
is an example of displaying the true heading Compass HDG
(True HDG), compass heading (Compass HDG)
(*1) and the value of speed error correction
(SPD Error).
If the command key is pressed, the screen re-
GYRO 1 >123.4 -00.5°
turns to normal mode.
GYRO 2 123.4 -00.5°
EXT 126.0
SPD Error
*1: The "Compass HDG" displayed on operation unit is the value which corrected with master compass installation error.
 Operation with the M.operation unit

NOTE
It is not possible to execute this function with the M.operation unit.
YOKOGAWA
The M.operation unit displays a compass heading at
normal mode. RUN
EXT
FAIL GYRO HEADING
EXT
COMMAND DATA
SHIFT UP COMMAND
BZ STOP
ENT
SET/ DIMMER

4.1.2 Displaying Heading Deviation

COMMAND CODE : 11
This function displays the heading deviation between gyrocompass heading and external heading.
The unit of display is degree(s).

Selecting "11 DEV" from the DISP MENU and
pressing the ENT key switches to the display
showing the heading deviation.
GYRO 1 >123.4 G2/G1 00.2º
Deviation values of each azimuth sensor based GYRO 2 123.6 E/G1 02.6º
on the heading currently being output are dis-
EXT 126.0 G2/E -02.4º
played.
Deviation
The figures on the right show examples of dis-
playing the heading deviations .
GYRO 1 123.4 G1/G2 -00.2º
If the command key is pressed, the screen re- GYRO 2 >123.6 E/G2 02.4º
turns to normal mode.
EXT 126.0 G1/E -02.6º
Deviation
GYRO 1 123.4 G1/E -02.4º

GYRO 2 123.6 G2/E -02.6º
EXT >126.0 G2/G1 00.2º
Deviation
NOTE
The deviation between gyrocompass and external signal is not displayed when external signal is
not input.

NOTE

4.1.3 Displaying Rate of Turn

COMMAND CODE : 12
This function displays the Rate of Turn. There are two kinds of units of display. One is “deg/s”, the
other hand is “deg/min”.

Selecting “12 ROT” from the DISP MENU and
pressing the ENT key switches to the display
showing the rate of turn. GYRO 1 >123.4 123.4°/min
Each turn rate for No.1 master compass and GYRO 2 123.4 123.4°/min
No.2 master compass are displayed in the first
and second line of the display ,respectively EXT 126.0
If the right and left arrow keys are pressed, the ROT
display for rate of turn units can be changed
from deg/min to deg/s.
The upper figure on the right shows an example
of displaying a rate of turn in deg/min and the GYRO 1 >123.4 12.34°/s
lower figure on the right, an example of display-
ing a rate of turn in deg/s. GYRO 2 123.4 12.34°/s
EXT 126.0
ROT

NOTE

4.1.4 Displaying Running Time

COMMAND CODE : 13
This function displays the total running time of Master compass, the running time of gyrosphere and the run-
ning time after startup.

GYRO 1 >123.4 G1 001234hr
Selecting “13 Run Time” from the DISP MENU
and pressing the ENT key switches to the display GYRO 2 123.4 G2 001235hr
showing the running time.
EXT 126.0 OP 012345hr
The first line (G1), second line (G2), and third line Total time
(OP) indicate the running time of No. 1 master
compass, No. 2 master compass, and the op-
eration unit, respectively.
GYRO 1 >123.4 G1 012345hr
If the right and left arrow keys are pressed, the GYRO 2 123.4 G2 001236hr
display can be switched between the total run-
ning time, gyrosphere running time, and time
EXT 126.0
after startup. Gyro time
The upper, middle and lower figures on the right

show examples of displaying total running time
(Total time), gyrosphere running time (Gyro time) GYRO 1 >123.4 G1 000123hr
and the time after startup (Power time) respec-
GYRO 2 123.4 G2 000124hr
tively.
EXT 126.0 OP 000123hr
Power time

NOTE
The M.operation unit displays the gyrosphere-running-time only .
Running hours of the current gyrosphere is displayed

(from 000000 to 999999 hours). YOKOGAWA
If the command code “13” is executed, the upper two

RUN
digits of the six digits of the gyrosphere running time are
displayed in the data display. EXT
FAIL GYRO HEADING
If the SHIFT key is pressed, the middle two digits of
the six digits are displayed, and if the SHIFT key is
EXT
pressed once more the lower two digits of the six dig-
its with a decimal point after the least significant digit COMMAND DATA
are displayed. SHIFT UP COMMAND
ENT
BZ STOP
If for example, the running time of the gyrosphere is 1952
hours, the digits “00” → “19” → “52.” will be displayed. SET/ DIMMER
If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to

normal.

4.1.5 Dimmer and Contrast Rank Display and Adjust

COMMAND CODE : 14
This function displays dimmer rank and contrast rank on the C.operation unit.
 Operation with the C.operation unit

Selecting "14 Dim level" from the DISP MENU
and pressing the ENT key switches to the dis-
play showing the dimmer rank (as shown in the GYRO 1 >123.4 16/32 DIM
figure on the right).
GYRO 2 123.4 13/32 CONT
EXT 126.0
The figure to the right shows an example of dis-
playing the dimmer rank of 16 and contrast rank Dim level
of 13 in the operation unit.
 adjusting the value

The dimmer rank is adjusted by operating the DIMMER key.
The contrast rank is adjusted by operating the DIMMER key while pressing the ENT key.
To increase the brightness and contrast, press key.
To decrease the brightness and contrast, press key.

NOTE
M.operation unit does not display the dimmer rank.
 adjusting the value

The dimmer rank is adjusted by operating the SET/DIMMER key. To increase the brightness, press
▲ key. To decrease the brightness , press ▼ key.

4.1.6 Displaying Gyrosphere Phase Current

COMMAND CODE : 15
This function displays the gyro sphere’s phase current (gyro sphere’s driving current). This value is
useful for estimating the gyro sphere’s state.
The normal value is in the range from 0.15 A to 0.35 A.

Selecting “15 G.Current” from the DISP MENU
play showing the gyro-sphere phase current (as GYRO 1 >123.4 0.21 A
shown in the figure on the right). GYRO 2 123.4 0.21 A
EXT 126.0
The normal value is in the range from 0.15 A to
0.35 A. Gyro Current

The gyrosphere phase current (current for driving the gy- YOKOGAWA
rosphere) is displayed (0.00 to 0.99 A).
Normal value : from 0.15 A to 0.35 A. RUN

EXT
If the command code “15” is executed, two decimal plac-
es of the gyrosphere phase current are displayed in the FAIL GYRO HEADING
data display.
EXT
The figure to the right shows an example of 0.21A of the
gyrosphere phase current. COMMAND DATA
SHIFT UP COMMAND
If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to BZ STOP
ENT
normal.
SET/ DIMMER

4.1.7 Displaying Backup Battery Voltage

COMMAND CODE : 16
This function displays battery voltage of being used for backup memory.
If this command is executed with the C.operation unit, the unit displays battery voltage of the
C.operation unit and the Master compass.
If this command is executed with the M.operation unit, the unit displays battery voltage of the Mas-
ter compass.
The normal value is in the range from 2.5 V to 4.0 V.

Selecting “16 BAT Volt” from the DISP MENU
GYRO 1 >123.4 G1 3.75V
play showing the backup battery voltage (as
shown in the figure on the right). GYRO 2 >123.4 G2 3.75V
EXT 126.0 OP 3.98V
BAT Volt

The voltage of the battery for backup memory is displayed
(from 0.0 to 9.9 V). YOKOGAWA
RUN
If the command code “16” is executed, the backup battery EXT
voltage is displayed in the data display. FAIL GYRO HEADING
The figure to the right shows an example of 3.6 V for the
voltage of the backup battery. EXT
If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to COMMAND DATA
normal. SHIFT UP COMMAND
ENT
BZ STOP
SET/ DIMMER

4.1.8 Displaying Deviation Volatage

COMMAND CODE : 17
This function displays deviation voltage of used Master compass.
The normal value is in the range from -0.4 V to 0.4 V.

Selecting “17 DEV Volt” from the DISP MENU
and pressing the ENT key switches to the display
showing the deviation voltage (as shown in the GYRO 1 >123.4 0.12V
figure on the right). >123.4 0.23V
GYRO 2
EXT 126.0
DEV Volt

NOTE

4.1.9 Dispalying Software Version Number

COMMAND CODE : 19
This function displays software version number.
If this command is executed with the C.operation unit, the unit displays the version of the C.opera-
tion unit and the Master compass.
If this command is executed with the M.operation unit, the unit displays version of the Master
compass.

Selecting “19 Soft.Ver.” from the DISP MENU
play showing the software version number (as GYRO 1 >123.4 G1 CD065A01
shown in the figure on the right).
GYRO 2 123.4 G2 CD065A01
If the command key is pressed, the screen re-
turns to normal mode. EXT 126.0 OP CD066A01
Soft.Ver.

The software version number of master compass is
shown by major version (alphabet) and minor version YOKOGAWA
(numerical value).
RUN
The major version is shown by numerical value at M.op-
eration unit. The version “A” is shown as ‘01’. The minor EXT
version is shown by numerical value of two digits. FAIL GYRO HEADING
When command 19 is executed, the major version is dis-
played. The minor version is displayed by pressing shift EXT
key. The decimal point is displayed in displaying the minor COMMAND DATA
version. SHIFT UP COMMAND
BZ STOP
ENT
The display is switched by pressing the shift key.
SET/ DIMMER
The figure on the right shows an example of displaying
software version number “A01”.
YOKOGAWA
RUN
EXT
FAIL GYRO HEADING
EXT
COMMAND DATA
SHIFT UP COMMAND
BZ STOP
ENT
SET/ DIMMER

 The operation flow diagram of the display function (C.operation unit)
Displaying Displaying Heading Displaying Rate Displaying

Heading Deviation of Turn Running Time
DISP MENU DISP MENU DISP MENU DISP MENU
Midium 10 HDG 10 HDG 10 HDG 13 Run Time
classfication 11 DEV 11 DEV 11 DEV 14 Dim level
A
menu 12 ROT 12 ROT 12 ROT 15 G.Current
ENT ENT ENT ENT
123.4 ° 123.4 °/min G1 001234hr

GYRO 1 >123.4 G2/G1 00.2 °
123.4 ° 123.5 °/min G2 001235hr
GYRO 2 123.6 E/G1 02.6 °
OP 012345hr
EXT 126.0 E/G2 -02.4 °
True HDG ROT Total time
Deviation
122.9 ° 12.34 °/s G1 012345hr

122.9 ° -12.35 °/s G2 001236hr
Compass HDG ROT Gyro time
-00.5° G1 000123hr
-00.5° G2 000124hr
OP 000123hr
SPD Error Power time
Displaying Displaying Displaying Displaying Dispalying

Dimmer Rank Gyrosphere Backup Battery Deviation Software Version
Phase Current Voltage Voltage Number
DISP MENU DISP MENU DISP MENU DISP MENU DISP MENU
13 Run Time 13 Run Time 16 BAT Volt 16 BAT Volt 17 DEV Volt
A
14 Dim level 14 Dim level 17 DEV Volt 17 DEV Volt 18 reserved
15 G.Current 15 G.Current 18 reserved 18 reserved 19 Soft.Ver.
ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT
16/32 DIM 0.25 A G1 3.75V 0.15V G1 CD065A01

13/32 CONT 0.26 A G2 3.76V 0.16V G2 CD065A01
OP 3.98V OP CD066A01
Dim level Gyro Current BAT Volt DEV Volt Soft.Ver.
From any screen

COMMAND
Normal mode

 The operation flow diagram of the display function (M.operation unit)
Displaying gyrosphere Displaying gyrosphere Displaying backup Diplaying software

running time phase current battery voltage version number
GYRO HEADING GYRO HEADING GYRO HEADING GYRO HEADING
COMMAND DATA COMMAND DATA COMMAND DATA COMMAND DATA
SHIFT SHIFT
GYRO HEADING GYRO HEADING
COMMAND DATA COMMAND DATA
SHIFT
SHIFT
From any screen

GYRO HEADING
COMMAND
BZ STOP
COMMAND DATA
SHIFT
Normal mode

4.2 Setting Functions

The setting function is used for setting and adjusting to using the gyrocompass properly.
The maintenance functions include the following:
Operation Execution
Code
Standby
C M
26 ○ ○ alarm
○ 4-22


Each functions are executed by operation of the C.operation unit or the M.operation unit.
See the section 3.2 for the operation unit

4.2.1 External Heading Input Selection

COMMAND CODE : 20
C.operation unit has 3 input ports for the serial signal and all port can be connected the heading
sensors. This COMMAND executes the status display of each port and the selection of external
heading sensor that display as EXT.
The example of connected external heading sensor and the selecting procedure are as follows.
 The example of connected external heading sensor

Port 1 : Magnetic compass (TMC unit)
Port 2 : THD
Port 3 : disconnected

Selecting “20 EXT SEL” from the Operat.
MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to
the display showing the external heading input GYRO 1 >123.4 >Port-1 OK
selection.
GYRO 2 123.4 Port-2 NG
EXT 126.0 Port-3 NONE
External heading input information for external
heading input ports 1 to 3 is displayed (as shown EXT HDG SEL
in the figure on the right).
External heading input information

NONE Without external heading input setting
OK With external heading input setting; External heading input information is being normally input.
NG With external heading input setting; External heading input information failure is being generated.
For the port used as the external heading, “>” is displayed immediately before “Port-.”
In order to change input ports, move the “>” to the targeted port by pressing the up or down arrow
key and press the ENT key. The display blinks, signaling the need to validate the change.
If the ENT key is pressed again, blinking stops and the input port is changed. However, the port
cannot be changed without setting the external heading input.

NOTE

4.2.2 Speed Setting for Speed Error Correction

COMMAND CODE : 21
This is a function to setting the ship’s speed for correcting speed-error.
Determine the true heading by calculation the value for speed-error-correction from the values of
speed and latitude.
True heading (degrees) =
(compass heading) – (Value of speed-error-correction) – (Value of Installation-error-correction)
Value of speed-error-correction (degrees) = Ship’s speed [knot] cos (Compass heading)

×
5π cos (Latitude)

Selecting “21 SPD SET” from the Operat.MENU
and pressing the ENT key switches to the display GYRO 1 >123.4 +23kn
showing speed-error correction speed input.
The figure on the right shows an example of dis- GYRO 2 AUTO
playing ship’s speed of 23 knots (kn) with auto- EXT 126.0
matic input.
To select automatic or manual input, press the SPD SET
ENT key. Both AUTO and MANUAL blink. Then,
with the up or down key select either AUTO or
MANUAL and press the ENT key.
If AUTO is selected, the automatic ship’s speed input becomes valid.
If MANUAL is selected, the tens digit of the ship’s speed blinks, allowing for a value between 00 to
99 kn to be entered for the ship’s speed by manual.
Press the right or left arrow key to change the place of input and press the up or down arrow key
to change the numeric value.
After entering ship’s speed press the ENT key. The input value blinks, signaling the need to validate
the change. If the ENT key is pressed again, blinking stops and the input value is changed.
NOTE
In the ship which apply DNV NAUTICAL SAFTY(rule in July 2010), when the input method of speed
is changed, the latitudinal input method is also changed automatically.


If the command code “21” is executed, the current speed YOKOGAWA
is displayed in the data display and its tens digit (digit to Yokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd
be entered) blinks.
RUN
Press the shift key to change the digit and then change EXT
the numeric value of the digit by pressing the UP key to GYRO HEADING
FAIL
enter a new speed (from 00 to 99 kn). The figure to the
right shows an example of entering the speed 10 kn.
EXT
After entering the speed, the entered value blinks if the COMMAND DATA
ENT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds to enable the
SHIFT UP COMMAND
operator to confirm the value. If the ENT key is pressed BZ STOP
ENT
for another 2 seconds, the entered value is displayed
continuously and is set as the final value. SET/ DIMMER

normal.
NOTE
It is not possible to execute this function while speed signal input is on AUTO mode.

4.2.3 Latitude Setting for Speed Error Correction

COMMAND CODE : 22
This is a function to setting the ship’s latitude for correcting speed-error.
Determine the true heading by calculation the value for speed-error-correction from the values of
speed and latitude.
True heading (degrees) =
(compass heading) – (Value of speed-error-correction) – (Value of Installation-error-correction)
Ship’s speed [knot] cos (Compass heading)

Value of speed-error-correction (degrees) = ×
5π cos (Latitude)

Selecting “22 LAT SET” from the Operat.MENU
and pressing the ENT key switches to the display GYRO 1 >123.4 N 39°
showing the speed-error correcting latitude input.
The figure on the right shows an example of dis- GYRO 2 123.4 AUTO
playing the latitude of 39 °N.
EXT 126.0
To select automatic or manual input, press the
ENT key. Both AUTO and MANUAL blink. Then, LAT SET
with the up or down key select either AUTO or
MANUAL and press the ENT key.
If AUTO is selected, the automatic latitude input becomes valid.
If MANUAL is selected, the character N or S blinks allowing for a value between 00 to 70 degrees
N or S to be entered for the ship’s latitude by manual.
Select N or S with up or down arrow key and press ENT key.
After entering the latitude press the ENT key. The input value blinks, signaling the need to validate
the change. If the ENT key is pressed again, blinking stops and the input value is changed.
If the COMMAND key is pressed the mode return to normal.
NOTE
In the ship which apply DNV NAUTICAL SAFTY(rule in July 2010), when the latitudinal input
method is changed, the input method of speed also changes automatically.


If the command code “22” is executed, the current latitude
is displayed in the data display and its tens digit (digit to YOKOGAWA
be entered) blinks. If the latitude displayed is south, a

decimal point is displayed after the least significant digit. RUN
For example, with a latitude of 16° S, “16.” is displayed. EXT
To change the digit, press the SHIFT key and then change FAIL GYRO HEADING
the numeric value of the digit by pressing the UP key to
enter a latitude (from 00 N or S to 70 N or S). The figure EXT
to the right shows an example of entering 45° N. COMMAND DATA
After a value for the latitude has been entered, the en- SHIFT UP COMMAND
BZ STOP
ENT
tered value blinks if the ENT key is kept pressed for 2
seconds to enable the operator to confirm the value. If the SET/ DIMMER
ENT key is pressed for another 2 seconds, the entered
value is displayed continuously and is set as the final
value.
If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.
NOTE
It is not possible to execute this function while speed signal input is on AUTO mode.

4.2.4 Automatic Alignment of Master Compass

COMMAND CODE : 23
This is a function to align the azimuth of the container and the compass heading by detecting the
zero point of the gyrocompass system again.

Selecting "23 SYNC AUTO" from the Operat.
MENU and pressing the ENT key switches the
display showing automatic master compass GYRO 1 >123.4 Follow Up
alignment (as shown in the figure on the right).
GYRO 2 123.4 Follow Up
"Follow Up" is displayed, signifying that the mas- EXT 126.0 Gyro=G1
ter compass is following up the gyrosphere. SYNC AUTO
After pressing the ENT key, G1 blinks, enabling

the operator to select the master compass with
which automatic alignment is conducted (G1 GYRO 1 >123.4 Ready
or G2 or G1/G2) by pressing the up or down
arrow keys. GYRO 2 123.4 Follow Up
Pressing the ENT key again after selection has EXT 126.0 Gyro=G1
been made calls up the Ready display, which
indicates standby for automatic alignment mode. SYNC AUTO
(The second and subsequent figures on the
right show examples of the display indication
when No. 1 master compass is automatically
aligned.) GYRO 1 >123.4 Running
If the ENT key is again pressed, the "Running"
display appears showing that automatic align- EXT 126.0 Gyro=G1
ment is being carried out. (The master compass
starts automatic alignment.) SYNC AUTO
If automatic alignment finishes normally, the

"Success" display appears. If the automatic
alignment finished abnormally, the alarm will be
generated. If a failure occurs, execute master GYRO 1 >123.4 Success
compass alignment manually
EXT 126.0 Gyro=G1
SYNC AUTO


If the command code “23” is executed, alignment starts
and the container rotates to detect the zero point: “CA” YOKOGAWA
blinks in the data display and the alignment can be sus-

pended by pressing the COMMAND key. RUN
EXT
If the alignment is completed normally, “CA” is still dis-
played but stops blinking and the gyro heading display FAIL GYRO HEADING
indicates “000.0” (see the figure to the right).
EXT
If the alignment is not successful (zero point cannot be
detected), an alarm is generated and the “CA” continues COMMAND DATA
to blink. If this occurs, carry out manual alignment. SHIFT UP COMMAND
ENT
BZ STOP
normal. SET/ DIMMER

4.2.5 Manual Alignment of Master Compass

COMMAND CODE : 24
If automatic Master compass alignment cannot be executed, it is necessary to adjust the compass
heading to the container heading. There are relative value alignment and absolute value alignment
as the adjustment method.
CAUTION
Please make zero degree the speed error correction value by setting ship’s speed 0 knot by using
code “21” when you execute this adjustment.
 Relative value alignment

The error of the observation bearing that was measured by the gyrocompass is entered as the input
value. (Input range : - 180 ° to + 180° )
Input value = (true reading through astronomical observation) - (compass reading)
Easterly : “-”, Westerly : “+”
For example, if compass reading is “050.0” and the true reading through astronomical observation
is “020.0”, the input value is “- 30”.
This method may be effective in case of sailing because the standard of absolute heading can be
not obtained.
 Absolute value alignment

By inputting present absolute heading the compass heading is adjusted to the value.
Input value = (true heading)
This method may be effective in the dock, because the standard of absolute heading can be obtained.


Selecting “24 SYNC MAN” from the Operat. MENU and pressing the ENT key, switches to the
display showing the manual master compass alignment (as shown in the figure on the right).
If the ENT key is pressed, “G1” blinks, and allow
to select master compass which is executed
manual alignment. Select master compass us- GYRO 1 >123.4 REL +000.0
ing up and down key (G1,G2,G1/G2), and press GYRO 2 123.4 REL +000.0
ENT key.
If G1 or G1/G2 is selected, the first line “REL” EXT 126.0 Gyro=G1
blinks and be shifted to Rrelative value align- SYNC MAN
ment mode. If G2 is selected, the second line
“REL” blinks and be shifted to Relative value
alignment mode.
Select Absolute value alignment (ABS:0 to 359.9 degrees) or Relative value alignment (REL:±180
degrees) using up and down key, and press ENT key. Move cursor to alter place using right and
left key, and change sign or value using up and down key.
After the value is changed, press ENT key, then input value start blink. If the blinking value is OK,
press ENT key. The blinking will be stopped and the master compass will be aligned.
If you select G1/G2, second line “REL” starts blinking. You can do No.2 master compass manual
alignment.

If the command code “24” is executed, the data display
indicates “AE,” the gyro heading display indicates “000.0” YOKOGAWA
and the mode changes to relative value alignment setting

mode. RUN
If the EXT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds, the data EXT
display indicates “AH” and the gyro heading display indi- FAIL GYRO HEADING
cates the current compass heading and the mode chang-
es to the absolute value alignment setting mode. (Switch EXT
between the setting modes with the EXT key.) DATA
COMMAND
The hundreds digit (digit to be entered) of the display in SHIFT UP COMMAND
the gyro heading display blinks. BZ STOP
ENT
To change the digit, press the SHIFT key and then change SET/ DIMMER
the numeric value of the digit by pressing the UP key
(relative value: - 180.0 to 180.0 degrees; absolute value:
000.0 to 359.9 degrees).
If a negative value is to be entered, set the digit to be entered to the most significant digit (hundreds
digit) and press the UP key several times until the data display indicates “AE.” display.
After entering a heading, the entered value blinks if the ENT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds to
enable the operator to confirm the value. If the ENT key is pressed for another 2 seconds, the
entered value is displayed continuously and is set as the final value.

4.2.6 Setting the Master Compass Follow-up Gain

COMMAND CODE : 25
Adjust the Master compass follow-up gain when there is a deadband in the follow-up actions and
thus follow-up is not smooth or when hunting occurs because the gain is too high.

Selecting “25 FOL GAIN” from the Maint. MENU
and pressing the ENT key switches to the display GYRO 1 >123.4 100 %
showing the current setting of follow-up gain.
GYRO 2 123.4 100 %
Press the ENT key again, then the "G1" blinks.
Selecting "G1" (No 1 Master-compass) or "G2" EXT 126.0 Gyro=G1
( No 2 Master-compass ) by the upper and low-
er arrow keys and press the ENT key again, then FOL GAIN
the follow-up gain blinks.
Pressing the upper arrow key increases the gain
by 5 % (MAX 200 %).
Pressing the lower arrow key decreases the gain by 5 % (MIN 10 %).
After entering the gain value, press the ENT key. All the digits blink for confirmation.
Press the ENT key again. The follow-up gain finally changes to the value you set.

If the command code “25” is executed, the data display indi-
cates the current gain (two digits of hundreds and tens) and YOKOGAWA
the digit of hundreds (digit to be entered) blinks.

Change the digit to be entered by pressing the SHIFT key RUN
and then change the numeric value of the digit to be entered EXT
by pressing the UP key to enter a gain value (01 to 20). FAIL GYRO HEADING
The figure on the right shows an example of entering a
gain of 95 %. (Standard: 100 %) EXT
COMMAND DATA
After entering a gain, the entered value blinks if the ENT
SHIFT UP
key is kept pressed for 2 seconds to enable the operator COMMAND
BZ STOP
ENT
to confirm the value. If the ENT key is pressed for an-
other 2 seconds, the entered value is displayed continu- SET/ DIMMER
ously and is set as the final value.
normal.

4.2.7 Displaying/Resetting Cause of Master Compass Alarm

COMMAND CODE : 26
When an alarm is generated, carry out the following procedure to check the error contents:

Selecting "26 ERRREF MC" from the Operat.
the display showing the cause of the master GYRO 1 >123.4 G1:CODE= 010
compass alarm.
The figure on the right shows an example of a
GYRO 2 ---.- Gyro current
display when a gyrosphere failure is generated EXT >126.0 excess
in No.2 master compass.
ERRREF MC
If an alarm is generated, the master compass
(G1 or G2) and an error code are displayed in
the first line, and the error contents in the second
and third lines.
If the first line of the display blinks, it means that the cause of the alarm has not yet been recovered;
if it is not blinking the cause has already been recovered.
If there are two or more causes of an alarm, the other causes of the alarm are displayed by press-
ing the right or left arrow key.
When the cause of an alarm has already been recovered, pressing the ENT key cancels the display.

If the command code “26” is executed, an error code is
displayed in the data display for the cause of alarm gen- YOKOGAWA
erated and detected in the Master compass.

A decimal point is displayed after the least significant RUN
digit of the error code. The figure to the right shows an EXT
example in which the backup battery voltage failure is FAIL GYRO HEADING
being generated.
An error code without a decimal point means that the EXT
error that caused the alarm has already been rectified, COMMAND DATA
and if the ENT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds it will be SHIFT UP COMMAND
reset and the error message will disappear. BZ STOP
ENT
If there was no reason for the generation of the alarm, SET/ DIMMER
then “--” is displayed.
In addition, if there is more than one cause for the gen-
eration of the alarm, the error code with the smallest code number is displayed first and the follow-
ing codes can be displayed by pressing the UP key. For example, pressing the UP key may switch
the displayed error codes between “40” → “50” → “60” .

4.2.8 Displaying/Resetting Cause of C.Operation Unit Alarm

COMMAND CODE : 27
When an alarm is generated, carry out the following procedure to check the error contents:

Selecting “27 ERRREF OP” from the Operat.
MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the
display showing the cause of C.operation unit GYRO 1 >123.4 No error at
alarm.
GYRO 2 123.4 operation
The figure on the right shows an example of a
display when no alarm cause in C.operation unit EXT 126.0 unit
is shown. ERRREF OP
If there is an alarm occurring, the corresponding
error code is displayed on the first line and the
error contents on the second and third lines.
If the first line of the display blinks, it means that the cause of the alarm has not yet been recovered;
if it is not blinking the cause has already been recovered.
If there are two or more causes of an alarm, the other causes of the alarm are displayed by press-
ing the right or left arrow key.
When the cause of an alarm has already been recovered, pressing the ENT key cancels the display.
See section 5.2.4 for the procedure to check the error contents.

NOTE

4.2.9 Deviation Alarm Setting

COMMAND CODE : 28
This is the function to set a limit value of the deviation alarm that is generated by difference between
the current heading and the external heading.

Selecting “28 DEV ALARM” from the Operat.
the display showing the deviation alarm setting. GYRO 1 >123.4 G1/G2 05.0°
GYRO 2 123.4 G1/E 10.0°
The figure on the right shows an example of EXT 126.0 G2/E 10.0°
the deviation limit value to generate a devia-
tion alarm (difference of Master compass DEV ALARM
heading from external input heading) being at
10.0 degrees.
If the ENT key is pressed, the tens place of the deviation alarm limit value blinks to allow the value
to be entered.
After entering the limit value press the ENT key. Then the input value blinks, signaling the need to
validate the change. If the ENT key is pressed again, blinking stops and the input value is changed.
In addition, if the limit value is set to “00.0” a deviation alarm is not generated.
NOTE
In the case of the ship which apply DNV NAUTICAL SAFTY(rule in July 2010), the setting range
of the deviation alarm threshold value of G1/G2 is limited among 3.0 to 6.0 degrees.

NOTE

4.2.10 Startup Timer Setting

COMMAND CODE : 29
This function restarts the gyro system automatically after a preset time.
CAUTION
Don’t cut off DC power supply for gyro system during timer mode.
If the startup time is set to “00”, the system goes into “timer mode” for one minute and the power
supply to the gyrosphere is stopped.
In addition, the system is normally started up at the heading that was selected when the power
switch was turned off, however, the output heading if the system is started up using the timer func-
tion, becomes the gyro heading. At this time, the last selected gyro compass signal is used for
output.

Selecting “29 W-UP Time” from the Operat.
MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to GYRO 1 >123.4 00[Hour]
the display showing the startup timer setting (as
shown in the figure on the right). GYRO 2 123.4
EXT 126.0
If the ENT key is pressed, the tens place of the
W-UP.Time
startup time blinks to allow a startup time be-
tween 00 to 99 hours to be entered.
Press the right or left arrow key to change the
place of input and press the up or down arrow
key to change the numeric values. GYRO 1 Next wake
After entering the time press the ENT key. The GYRO 2 up to
input value blinks, signaling the need to validate
the input. EXT 07.59.29
If the ENT key is again pressed, the system
goes into timer mode and the power supply to
the gyrosphere is stopped.
In timer mode the time until restart is displayed (as shown in the figure on the right).
If the ENT key is pressed when in timer mode, the timer is reset and the system can be immedi-
ately started.
In addition, the system is normally started up at the heading that was selected when the power
switch was turned off, however, the output heading if the system is started up using the timer func-
tion, becomes the gyro heading.

NOTE

External heading Speed setteing for Latitude setteing for Automatic alignment of
input selection speed error correction speed error correction master compass
4-28
Midium Operat.MENU Operat.MENU Operat.MENU Operat.MENU
IM80B10M-17E
classifi- 20 EXT SEL 20 EXT SEL 20 EXT SEL 23 SYNC AUTO
cation A
21 SPD SET 21 SPD SET 21 SPD SET 24 SYNC MAN
menu 22 LAT SET 22 LAT SET 22 LAT SET 25 FOL GAIN
ENT ENT ENT ENT
>Port-1 OK +23kn +00kn N 39 ° N 00° Follow up

Port-2 OK AUTO MANUAL AUTO MANUAL Follow up
Port-3 NONE Gyro=G1
EXT HDG SEL SPD SET SPD SET LAT SET LAT SET SYNC AUTO
6th Edition : Aug.01,2014-00

ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT
>Port-1 OK Port-1 OK +23kn +00kn N 39 ° N 00°

Port-2 OK >Port-2 OK AUTO MANUAL AUTO MANUAL
Follow up Follow up Follow up
Port-3 NONE Port-3 NONE Follow up Follow up Follow up
EXT HDG SEL EXT HDG SEL SPD SET SPD SET LAT SET LAT SET
Gyro=G1 Gyro=G2 Gyro=G1/G2
ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT SYNC AUTO SYNC AUTO SYNC AUTO
ENT
>Port-1 OK Port-1 OK +23kn +00kn N 39 ° N 00 ° S 00 °
Port-2 OK >Port-2 OK AUTO MANUAL AUTO MANUAL MANUAL Ready
Port-3 NONE Port-3 NONE Follow up
EXT HDG SEL EXT HDG SEL SPD SET SPD SET LAT SET LAT SET LAT SET Gyro=G1
ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT SYNC AUTO
ENT
>Port-1 OK Port-1 OK N 00°
Port-2 OK >Port-2 OK ENT MANUAL
Running
< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >
Port-3 NONE Port-3 NONE

Follow up
EXT HDG SEL EXT HDG SEL +12kn LAT SET
Gyro=G1
MANUAL
ENT ENT SYNC AUTO
SPD SET
ENT ENT Success
Follow up
N 28° Gyro=G1
+12kn
MANUAL MANUAL SYNC AUTO
From any screen LAT SET

SPD SET ENT
COMMAND ENT ENT
N 28°
Nomal mode MANUAL
LAT SET
 The operation flow diagram of the setting function (C.operation unit) ···1/3
ENT
Operat.MENU
23 SYNC AUTO
A B
24 SYNC MAN
25 FOL GAIN
ENT
COMMAND
REL +000.0
REL +000.0
Gyro=G1
SYNC MAN
ENT
REL +000.0 REL +000.0 REL +000.0

REL +000.0 REL +000.0 REL +000.0
Gyro= G1 Gyro=G2 Gyro=G1/G2
SYNC MAN SYNC MAN SYNC MAN
1
ENT ENT ENT
REL +000.0 ABS 000.0 REL +000.0 REL +000.0 REL +000.0 ABS 000.0 REL +012.3 REL +012.3
REL +000.0 REL +000.0 REL +000.0 ABS 000.0 REL +000.0 REL +000.0 REL +000.0 ABS 000.0
Gyro=G1 Gyro=G1 Gyro=G2 Gyro=G2 Gyro=G1/G2 Gyro=G1/G2 Gyro=G1/G2 Gyro=G1/G2
SYNC MAN SYNC MAN SYNC MAN SYNC MAN SYNC MAN SYNC MAN SYNC MAN SYNC MAN
ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT
IM80B10M-17E
ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT
REL +012.3 ABS 123.4 REL +000.0 REL +000.0 1 REL +012.3 REL +012.3
REL +000.0 REL +000.0 REL +012.3 ABS 123.4 REL +012.4 ABS 123.4
Gyro=G1 Gyro=G1 Gyro=G2 Gyro=G2 Gyro=G1/G2 Gyro=G1/G2
SYNC MAN SYNC MAN SYNC MAN SYNC MAN SYNC MAN SYNC MAN
ENT ENT ENT

4-29
Setting follow-up gain Display/resetting cause of Displaying/resetting cause of Deviation alarm setting Startup timer setting
master compass alarm C.operation unit alarm
4-30
Midium Operat.MENU Operat.MENU Operat.MENU Operat.MENU Operat.MENU
IM80B10M-17E
classifi- B 23 SYNC AUTO 26 ERRREF MC 26 ERRREF MC 26 ERRREF MC 27 ERRREF OP
cation 24 SYNC MAN 27 ERRREF OP 27 ERRREF OP 27 ERRREF OP
menu 28 DEV ALARM
25 FOL GAIN 28 DEV ALARM 28 DEV ALARM 28 DEV ALARM 29 W-UP Time
ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT
in case of released factor in case of released factor
100% G1:CODE=010 G1:CODE=090 OP:CODE=070 OP:CODE=110 G1/G2 00.0° 00[Hour]
100% Gyro curent ExtHDG input MC1 Transmit LAT input G1/E 00.0°
Gyro=G1 excess time-out failure time-out G2/E 00.0°
FOL GAIN ERRREF MC ERRREF MC ERRREF OP ERRREF OP DEV ALARM W-UP.Time

ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT
G1:CODE=010 OP:CODE=110 OP:CODE=070 G1/G2 00.0° 0 0[Hour]

Gyro curent LAT input MC1 Transmit G1/E 00.0 °
100% 100% 100%
100% 100% 100% excess time-out failure G2/E 00.0 °
ERRREF MC ERRREF OP ERRREF OP DEV ALARM W-UP.Time
Gyro=G1 Gyro=G2 Gyro= G1/G2
FOL GAIN FOL GAIN FOL GAIN ENT ENT
ENT
No error at
100% operation ENT ENT
unit
100%
ERRREF OP 18[Hour]
Gyro= G1/G2
FOL GAIN ENT
G1/G2 10.0° G1/G2 10.0°
G1/E 00.0 ° G1/E 11.0° W-UP.Time
G2/E 00.0 ° G2/E 00.0°

ENT ENT
DEV ALARM DEV ALARM
095% 095% From any screen ENT Next wake
100% 110% up to
Gyro= G1/G2 Gyro= G1/G2 COMMAND G1/G2 10.0° 17.59.59
FOL GAIN FOL GAIN G1/E 00.0° ENT
Normal mode G2/E 00.0 °
ENT ENT G1/G2 10.0° ENT
DEV ALARM
G1/E 11.0° Gyro starts
095% 095% G2/E 12.0°
100% 110% DEV ALARM Nomal mode
Gyro= G1/G2 Gyro=G1/G2
FOL GAIN FOL GAIN ENT ENT
ENT G1/G2 10.0 ° G1/G2 10.0°

ENT G1/E 11.0 ° G1/E 11.0°
G2/E 00.0 ° G2/E 12.0°
DEV ALARM DEV ALARM
ENT ENT
Setting the ship’ s spped Setting the latitude for Automatic master Manual master compass alignment
for speed error correction speed error correction compass alignment (Relative value alignment) (Absolute value alignment)
GYRO HEADING EXT GYRO HEADING

GYRO HEADING GYRO HEADING GYRO HEADING
Press for
COMMAND DATA 2 seconds COMMAND DATA
COMMAND DATA COMMAND DATA COMMAND DATA
UP SHIFT UP SHIFT
UP SHIFT UP SHIFT
‫ڸ‬ ‫ۂ‬ ‫ڸ‬ ‫ۂ‬
‫ڸ‬ ‫ۂ‬ ‫ڸ‬ ‫ۂ‬


SHIFT Press for SHIFT

UP UP ENT ENT
‫ۂ‬ 2 seconds ‫ۂ‬
‫ڸ‬ ‫ڸ‬


Press for
Press for ENT ENT
SHIFT Press for SHIFT 2 seconds
ENT ENT
2 seconds ‫ۂ‬ 2 seconds ‫ۂ‬

From any screen
COMMAND
BZ STOP Press for
ENT ENT
2 seconds
Press for ENT Press for ENT
2 seconds 2 seconds Normal mode
IM80B10M-17E

 The operation flow diagram of the setting function (M.operation unit) ···1/2
Press for Press for

ENT ENT
2 seconds 2 seconds

4-31
Setting master compass Displaying/resetting cause
4-32
follow-up gain of master compass alarm
IM80B10M-17E
GYRO HEADING
From any screen
GYRO HEADING
COMMAND
BZ STOP
UP SHIFT UP
‫ڸ‬ ‫ۂ‬ ‫ڸ‬
Normal mode

GYRO HEADING
GYRO HEADING
COMMAND DATA
COMMAND DATA
UP
‫ڸ‬ UP Press
ENT
‫ڸ‬ for 2 sec
GYRO HEADING
GYRO HEADING
COMMAND DATA
COMMAND DATA
Press for SHIFT
ENT
2 seconds ‫ۂ‬ Press for ENT
2 seconds
GYRO HEADING
GYRO HEADING
COMMAND DATA
COMMAND DATA
Press for ENT
2 seconds
Example of the setting value.

GYRO HEADING A decimal point is displayed after
the least significant digit of the error code
95% 105%
COMMAND DATA DATA
DATA
Press for ENT
200%
 The operation flow diagram of the setting function (M.operation unit) ···2/2
2 seconds DATA
4.3 Maintenance Functions

This section describes the functions used for maintenance. Do not use these functions in normal
state. When command codes of 30’s in the command functions are to be used, enable the mainte-
nance functions as shown in section 4.3.1.
CAUTION
Only technicians of the Service department of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd. are authorized to
implement the operations and other work described in this chapter. However, if for some reason the
service department of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. permits you to perform these operations, be
sure to follow the instructions described in this section.
The maintenance functions include the following:
Operation Execution
Code
Standby
C M
39 ○ ○ Displaying logged data ○ 4-44

NOTE
After changing the settings, restart the gyro system.

4.3.1 Permission for Maintenance Function

COMMAND CODE : 30
The maintain function is protected by password to reject mis-operation.
The command code “30” is the function to check password.
NOTE
Ask your nearest service agent of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. to implement the operation above.

Selecting “30 Password” from the Maint. MENU
play for entering a password (as shown in the GYRO 1 >123.4 Please input
upper figure on the right). GYRO 2 123.4 maintenance
Press the ENT key again. The ones digit of “00000”
blinks, prompting you to enter a password. EXT 126.0 password.
Press the right and left arrow keys to change the 00000
blinking digit, and press the upper and lower
arrow keys to change the numeric value.
After entering the correct password “XXXXX”,
press the ENT key. All the digits blink for GYRO 1 >123.4 Maintenance
confirmation.
GYRO 2 123.4 command is
Press the ENT key again. If the password is cor-
rectly entered, the maintenance functions are ena- EXT 126.0 available.
bled (as shown in the lower figure on the right).
When a wrong password is entered, the ones
digit of “00000” blinks again, prompting you to
reenter a password.
The maintenance functions are disabled by default whenever the power is turned on.

If the command code “30” is executed “00” is displayed in
the data display and the tens digit (digit to be entered ) of YOKOGAWA
“00” is blinking.
Change the displayed code to “XX” by using the up key RUN
to change the blinking numeric value and the SHIFT key EXT
to change the blinking digit. FAIL GYRO HEADING
After entering the code, the entered value blinks if the
ENT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds to enable the EXT
operator to confirm the value. If the ENT key is pressed COMMAND DATA
for another 2 seconds, the entered value is displayed SHIFT UP COMMAND
continuously and the maintenance functions are enabled BZ STOP
ENT
(in which the decimal point is displayed after the least
significant digit of the command display). SET/ DIMMER
If permission is denied then press ENT key for 2 seconds

and enter the code again.
If the COMMAN D key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.
The figure on the right shows an example of displaying the state in which the maintenance functions
are enabled.

4.3.2 Outputting Simulated DAC Signals

COMMAND CODE : 31
A simulated output of any of the following signals can be selected using this function : analog head-
ing signal, analog quadrant signal, or analog rate-of-turn signal.
The following graphs show the output span for each analog output.
 Heading (HDG) and quadrant (QUAD)  Rates of turn (ROT1, ROT2, and ROT3)
Output Level
Output Level
5.00 5.000
4.844
2.500
0V
0° 90° 180° 270° 360°
Heading signal 0.156
0V
Output - 30°/min 0°/min 30°/min
-100 100
5.00 -120 120
-300 Rate of turn 300
3.75
2.50
1.25
0V
0° 90° 180° 270° 360°
Quadrant signal

Selecting “31 DAC Dummy” from the Maint.
the display showing the simulated DAC sig- GYRO 1 >123.4 HDG 0.00 V
nal setting (as shown in the upper figure on
the right). GYRO 2 123.4
EXT 126.0
Press the ENT key again. The HDG blinks and DAC Dummy
an analog signal can be selected.
Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select
a channel from HDG (heading), QUAD (quad-
rant), ROT1 (rate of turn), ROT2, and ROT3,
then the ENT key. The channel stops blinking GYRO 1 >123.4 QUAD 1.23 V
and the ones digit of the output voltage level GYRO 2 123.4
blinks.
Press the right and left arrow keys to change the EXT 126.0
blinking digit, and press the upper and lower DAC Dummy
arrow keys to change the numeric value.
After entering the voltage level, press the ENT
key. All the digits blink for confirmation.
Press the ENT key again. The voltage level stops blinking and finally changes to the value you set.
The lower figure on the right shows an example of setting the simulated output of 1.23 V for the
quadrant signal of the Master compass.


If the command code “31” is executed, channel number
“1” blinks in the data display, and the analog output signal
level of each channel is set to the most recent level (initial
value of the simulated output). YOKOGAWA
If the UP key is pressed, the blinking display of channel RUN

number (1 to 5 channels) changes.
EXT
If a channel number is selected and the SHIFT key is FAIL GYRO HEADING
pressed, the current output level of that channel is dis-
played in the data display and its tens digit (digit to be
EXT
entered) blinks.
COMMAND DATA
Change the digit to be entered by pressing the SHIFT key SHIFT UP COMMAND
and then change the numeric value of the digit to be en- BZ STOP
ENT
tered by pressing the UP key to enter a simulated output
level (0.0 to 5.0 V). SET/ DIMMER
After entering the simulated output level, the channel

number and entered value alternately blink to enable the
operator to confirm the value if the ENT key is kept pressed
for 2 seconds. If the ENT key is pressed for another 2 YOKOGAWA
seconds;
(1) the entered value is displayed continuously, (2) the RUN
output level finally changes to the level you set, and (3) EXT
the channel number is again displayed in the data display FAIL GYRO HEADING
(blinking).
The figure on the right shows an example of setting the EXT
simulated output of 3.8 V for channel 2. COMMAND DATA
If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to SHIFT UP COMMAND
BZ STOP
ENT
normal.
Until the COMMAND key is pressed, the simulated output SET/ DIMMER
remains in the set level.
Channel No. Output signal

1 Analog heading
2 Analog quadrant
3 Analog rate of turn : port 1

4.3.3 Manual Drive of Master Compass

COMMAND CODE : 32
This function turns the Master compass at a specified speed to check the follow-up system of Mas-
ter compass.
During execution of this command, the container is released from the follow-up of the gyro-
sphere and can be rotated at a specified turning speed. In this condition, the Repeater compass
remains stopped.

Selecting “32 Rotate MC” from the Maint. MENU
play showing the angular speed setting of “00” GYRO 1 >123.4 Angular SPD
deg/s. GYRO 2 123.4 -12 deg/s
Press the ENT key again, then the “00” blinks.
Press the upper and lower arrow keys to change EXT 126.0 Gyro=G1
the angular speed as follows: Rotate MC
Pressing the upper arrow key repeatedly:

Accelerates the speed clockwise: 00 → 01 → 02 → 03 → 04 → 05 → 06 → 12 → 18 → 24 → 30
Decelerates the speed counterclockwise: -30 → -24 → -18 → -12 → -06 → -05 → -04 → -03 → -02 → -01 → 00
Pressing the lower arrow key repeatedly:

Accelerates the speed counterclockwise: 00 → - 01 → - 02 → -03 → -04 → -05 → -06 → -12 → -18 → -24 → -30
Decelerates the speed clockwise: 30 → 24 → 18 → 12 → 06 → 05 → 04 → 03 → 02 → 01 → 00
The figure on the right shows an example of displaying the angular speed of -12 deg/s.

If the command code “32” is executed, the gyro heading
display remains the present heading value, and the data YOKOGAWA
display indicates the turning speed (00 deg/s).
If the ▼ key is pressed, the Master compass turns clock- RUN
wise (CW) and if the ▲ key is pressed, it turns counter- EXT
clockwise (CCW). FAIL GYRO HEADING
The figure on the right shows an example of displaying
the turning speed of 06 deg/s. EXT
By pressing ▼ key or either ▲ key repeatedly, turning COMMAND DATA

speed accelerates. SHIFT UP COMMAND
ENT
BZ STOP
By pressing the key for the opposite direction, the turning
of Master compass decelerates, stops and then acceler- SET/ DIMMER
ates in the opposite direction.
normal.
The following is an example of the sequence of the data display when the ▼ key or ▲ key is pressed repeatedly.
Pressing the same key : 00 → 01 → 02 → 03 → 04 → 05 → 06 → 12 → 18 → 24 → 30
Pressing the opposite key: 30 → 24 → 18 → 12 → 06 → 05 → 04 → 03 → 02 → 01 → 00

4.3.4 Manual Drive of Repeater Compass

COMMAND CODE : 33
This function turns the Repeater compass at a specified speed to check the follow-up system of
Repeater compass.
During execution of this command, the Repeater compass is released from the follow-up of the
Master compass and can be rotated at a specified turning speed.

Selecting “33 Rotate RC” from the Maint. MENU
play showing the angular speed setting of “0.0” GYRO 1 >123.4 Angular SPD
deg/s.
GYRO 2 123.4 0.6 deg/s
Press the ENT key again, then the “0.0” blinks.
Press the upper and lower arrow keys to change EXT 126.0
the angular speed as follows:
Rotate RC
Pressing the upper arrow key repeatedly:

Accelerates the speed clockwise: 0.0 → 0.1 → 0.2 → 0.3 → 0.4 → 0.5 → 0.6 → 1.2 → 1.8 → 2.4 → 3.0
Decelerates the speed counterclockwise: -3.0 → -2.4 → -1.8 → -1.2 → -0.6 → -0.5 → -0.4 → -0.3 → -0.2 → -0.1 → 0.0
Pressing the lower arrow key repeatedly:

Accelerates the speed counterclockwise: 0.0 → - 0.1 → - 0.2 → -0.3 → -0.4 → -0.5 → -0.6 → -1.2 →- 1.8 → -2.4 → -3.0
Decelerates the speed clockwise: 3.0 → 2.4 → 1.8 → 1.2 → 0.6 →0.5 → 0.4 → 0.3 → 0.2 → 0.1 → 0.0
The figure on the right shows an example of displaying the angular speed of 0.6 deg/s.

If the command code “33” is executed, the gyro head-
ing display continues to indicate the compass head- YOKOGAWA
ing and the data display indicates the turning speed

(0.0 deg/s). RUN
If the ▼ key is pressed, the repeater-compass turns EXT
clockwise (CW), and if the ▲ key is pressed, it turns FAIL GYRO HEADING
counterclockwise (CCW).
The figure on the right shows an example of displaying EXT
the turning speed of 1.2 deg/s. COMMAND DATA
SHIFT UP COMMAND
By pressing ▼ key or either ▲ key repeatedly, turning BZ STOP
ENT
speed accelerates.
SET/ DIMMER
By pressing the key for the opposite direction, the turning
of Repeater compass decelerates, stops and then ac-
celerates in the opposite direction.
The following is an example of the sequence of the data display when the ▼ key or ▲ key is pressed repeatedly.
Pressing the same key : 0.0 → 0.1 → 0.2 → 0.3 → 0.4 → 0.5 → 0.6 → 1.2 → 1.8 → 2.4 → 3.0
Pressing the opposite key: 3.0 → 2.4 → 1.8 → 1.2 → 0.6 → 0.5 → 0.4 → 0.3 → 0.2 → 0.1 → 0.0

4.3.5 Resetting Gyrosphere Running Time

COMMAND CODE : 34
Use this function to reset the running time (hours) of the gyrosphere to zero when replacing the
gyrosphere. This operation is required to grasp the accurate running time of the gyrosphere for
adequate maintenance scheduling.
NOTE

Selecting “34 Reset RT” from the Maint.MENU
play for entering a password. GYRO 1 >123.4 G1 012345 hr
Press the ENT key , then the "G1" blinks. Se- GYRO 2 123.4 G2 006789 hr
lecting "G1"(No.1 Master-compass) or "G2"(
No.2 Master-compass ) by the upper and lower EXT 126.0 Gyro=G1
arrow keys and press the ENT key again.
Code=00000
The ones digit of "00000" blinks, prompting you
to enter a password.
Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking digit, and press the upper and lower arrow
keys to change the numeric value.
After entering the correct password “XXXXX”, press the ENT key. All the digits blink for confirma-
tion.
Press the ENT key again. If the password is correctly entered, the running time is reset to zero.
When a wrong password is entered, the ones digit of “00000” blinks again, prompting you to
reenter a password.

If the command code “34” is executed, “00” is displayed
in the data display and the tens digit (digit to be entered) YOKOGAWA
blinks.
Change the displayed code to “XX” by using the up key RUN
to change the blinking numeric value and the SHIFT key EXT
to change the blinking digit. See the figure on the right for FAIL GYRO HEADING
an example.
After entering the code, the entered value blinks if the EXT
ENT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds to enable the COMMAND DATA
operator to confirm the value. If the ENT key is pressed SHIFT UP COMMAND
ENT
for another 2 seconds, the entered value is displayed BZ STOP
continuously and the gyrosphere runtime is reset to

SET/ DIMMER
zero.(in which the decimal point is displayed after the
least significant digit of the command display).
If command is not available then press ENT key for 2
seconds, and enter the code again.

4.3.6 Resetting logged data

COMMAND CODE : 35
This function clears the error history and the command operation history.

Selecting “35 Reset LOG” from the Maint.
the displaying logged data. GYRO 1 >123.4 Unit=OP
Press the ENT key again. The OP blinks and a GYRO 2 123.4 Log =Error
target unit can be selected.
EXT 126.0 Code=00000
the unit from OP (C.operation unit) and G1 (Mas- Reset LOG
ter compass), then the ENT key.
The Error blinks and the logged data type can be
selected.
Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the logged data type from Err (logged error data)
or Com (logged command data), and press the ENT key.
The ones digit of “00000” blinks, prompting you to enter a password.
After entering the correct password “XXXXX”, press the ENT key. All the digits blink for confirmation.
Press the ENT key again. If the password is correctly entered, the logged data is reset.
reenter a password.

If the command code “35” is executed, the data display
indicates [EL] and press the shift key to select the logging
data type from EL (Logged error data) or CL (Logged
command data).
YOKOGAWA
Press the ENT key for 2 seconds. Yokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd
“00” is displayed in the data display and the tens digit RUN
(digit to be entered) blinks. EXT
Change the displayed code to “XX” by using the up key FAIL GYRO HEADING
to change the blinking numeric value and the SHIFT key
to change the blinking digit. if the ENT key is kept pressed EXT
for 2 seconds to enable the operator to confirm the value. COMMAND DATA
If the ENT key is pressed for another 2 seconds, the en-
SHIFT UP COMMAND
tered value is displayed continuously and the selected BZ STOP
ENT
logged data is reset .(in which the decimal point is dis-
played after the least significant digit of the command SET/ DIMMER
display).
seconds and enter the code again.

4.3.7 Initializing Backup Memory

COMMAND CODE : 36
Use this function to reset all the function settings.
CAUTION
DO NOT carry out the following operation unless instructed by an authorized service technician of
Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd.

Selecting “36 INIT MEM” from the Maint.MENU
play for entering a password. GYRO 1 >123.4 Unit=OP
Press the ENT key again. The OP blinks and a GYRO 2 Code=00000
target unit can be selected.
EXT 126.0
the unit from OP (C.operation unit) and G1 (Mas- INIT MEM
ter compass), then the ENT key. The unit stops
blinking and the ones digit of “00000” blinks.
After entering the correct password “XXXXX”, press the ENT key. All the digits blink for confirmation.
Press the ENT key again. If the password is correctly entered, the backup memory is initialized
when the power is turned on next time.
reenter a password.

If the command code “36” is executed, “00” is displayed
in the data display and the tens digit (digit to be entered)
blinks.
YOKOGAWA
Change the displayed code to “XX” by using the up key Yokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd
to change the blinking numeric value and the SHIFT key

to change the blinking digit. See the figure on the right RUN
for an example. EXT
FAIL GYRO HEADING
After entering the code, the entered value blinks if the
operator to confirm the value. If the ENT key is pressed EXT
for another 2 seconds, the entered value is displayed COMMAND DATA
continuously but the backup memory has not yet been SHIFT UP COMMAND
ENT
initialized. The backup memory is initialized when the BZ STOP
power is turned on next time.(in which the decimal point

SET/ DIMMER
is displayed after the least significant digit of the com-
mand display).
seconds, and enter the code again.

4.3.8 Correction of the Master Compass Installation Error

COMMAND CODE : 37
This section describes the procedure for correcting the error caused when the gyrocompass is not
installed in such a way that the lubber line of the Master compass is precisely aligned parallel with
the ship’s fore-and-aft line.
 Relative value correction

The procedure uses the compass heading error as the amount of correction.
Example:
0.56 (Amount of error correction) =
42.56 (true heading through astronomical observation) – 42.00 (compass heading)
CAUTION
The setting of installation-error by the relative value should be executed, after the last setting value
is returned to zero to prevent the setting mistake.
NOTE
The amount of correction for Master compass installation error is determined from the difference
between the compass heading detected by a reading when the Master compass is settled and an
accurate turn heading obtained through astronomical observation.
Perform these measurements when there is no change in the heading, such as when the ship is
docked.
 Absolute value correction

If the absolute true heading can be obtained, such as when the ship is docked, set it as the compass
heading.
Example:
(Input value) = (absolute true heading when the ship is docked)
NOTE
Whenever performing error correction, be sure to record the amount of correction in the maintenance
record book.


Selecting “37 INST ERR” from the Maint. MENU
play showing the current correction setting. GYRO 1 >123.4 REL +000.5
There are two correction procedures: relative GYRO 2 >123.4 REL -000.5
value correction and absolute value correc-
EXT 126.0 Gyro=G1
tion. The figure on the right shows the current
setting of 0.5°. INST ERR
In the example of display above, press the ENT
key, then REL (relative value correction) blinks.
Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the correction procedure from REL (relative: ±180)
and ABS(absolute: 0 to 359.9),and Press the ENT key.
Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking digit: sign (for absolute correction only)
→ the hundreds digit → the tens digit → the ones digit → the first decimal place
Press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the numeric value.
After entering the amount of correction, press the ENT key. All the digits blink for confirmation.
Press the ENT key again. The blinking stops and the correction method and the amount is finally set.

If error compensation is to be carried out using key operation, execute the command code “37.”
There are two compensation procedures; relative value compensation and absolute value com-
pensation. Pressing the EXT key for 2 seconds switches between these two procedures.
 Example of display for relative value  Example of display for absolute

compensation value compensation
YOKOGAWA
YOKOGAWA
RUN RUN
EXT EXT
FAIL GYRO HEADING FAIL GYRO HEADING
EXT EXT
SHIFT UP COMMAND SHIFT UP COMMAND
BZ STOP
ENT BZ STOP
ENT
SET/ DIMMER SET/ DIMMER

 Relative vlaue correction (AE)

The error of the observation bearing that was measured by the gyrocompass is entered as the
compensation value.
The gyro heading display indicates the current value of compensation and its tens digit (digit to be
entered) blinks.
Change the digit to be entered by pressing the SHIFT key and then change the numeric value of
the digit to be entered by pressing the UP key to enter the value of error compensation (- 180.0 to
180.0 degrees).
To enter a negative value, set the digit to be entered to the most significant digit (hundreds digit)
and press the UP key several times. When correction value is negative, M.operation unit displays
“AE.”.
After entering the value of compensation, the entered value blinks if the ENT key is kept pressed
for 2 seconds to enable the operator to confirm the value. If the ENT key is pressed for another 2
seconds, the entered value is displayed continuously and is set as the final value.
 Absolute value correction (AH)

If absolute ship’s heading is obtained by the quay-bearing etc. its heading value is input as compass
heading.
On the  display, the gyro heading display indicates “container heading + installation error com-
pensating value” and the hundreds digit (digit to be entered) blinks.
Change the digit to be entered by pressing the SHIFT key and then change the numeric value of
the digit to be entered by pressing the UP key to enter the compass heading (000.0 to 359.9
degrees).
After entering a heading, the entered value blinks if the ENT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds to
enable the operator to confirm the value. If the ENT key is pressed for another 2 seconds, the

4.3.9 Displaying Logged data

COMMAND CODE : 39
This function displays the logged data.
There are two kind of logged data. The one is logged error data , and the other is logged command
data .
If the number of logged data is over the maximum recordable number, the oldest logged data is
deleted.
The maximum number of logged error data is 100. The maximum number of logged command data
is 1000.
Selecting “39 LOG Ref.” from the Maint.MENU
and pressing the ENT key switches to the dis- GYRO 1 >123.4 Unit=OP Err
playing logged data display.
Press the ENT key again. The OP blinks and a GYRO 2 123.4 Num =
target unit can be selected. EXT 126.0 Code=
the unit from OP (C.operation unit) and G1 (Mas- Time=
ter compass), then the ENT key.
The Error blinks and the logged data type can be
selected.
Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select GYRO 1 >123.4 Unit=OP Err
the logged data type from Err (Logged error
data) or Com (Logged command data), then GYRO 2 123.4 Num =99
press enter key.
EXT 126.0 Code=080
The latest logged error data of the selected
unit is displayed. Time=012345
The second line indicates the error number (00
to 99), the third line the error code, and the fourth line the time of occurrence.
If the error number is 1 or more, or more than one error has occurred, pressing the lower arrow key
displays the immediately preceding logged data, and pressing the upper arrow key displays the
immediately following logged data. A larger error number corresponds to a later error.

If the command code “39” is executed, the data display indicates [EL] and press the SHIFT key to
select the logged data type from EL (Logged error data) or CL (Logged command data).
Press the ENT key for 2 seconds, then the data display indicates the logged data number of the
most recent logged data (0 to 99). ( That is the 31st logged data number is shown.)
Press the SHIFT key to switch between the logged data display items.
Logged data number → Logged data code → (Lower 2 digits of Logged data code :at CL) →Upper
2 digits of the generated time →intermediate 2 digits of the generated time → Lower 2 digits of the
generated time
If gyrosphere runtime is reset at replacing of gyrosphere, the error that generated later is recorded
by using the new runtime.
If the UP key is pressed, the previous data item is displayed.
NOTE
The maximum number of logged data which is displayed on M.operation unit is 100.

Example of displaying "EL" Example of displaying logged data number

YOKOGAWA
YOKOGAWA
RUN RUN
EXT EXT
EXT EXT
BZ STOP
ENT BZ STOP
ENT
The display items can be identified by the decimal point displayed in the command display and data display.
Decimal point
Display item
Command display Data display
00 00 Logged data number
00. 00 Upper 2 digits of logged data code
00. 00. Lower 2 digits of logged data code (at CL)
0.0 00 Upper 2 digits of generated time
0.0 00. Intermediate 2 digits of generated time
0.0 0.0. Lower 2 digits of generated time
Example of displaying an error code Example of displaying generated time 1

YOKOGAWA
YOKOGAWA
RUN RUN
EXT EXT
EXT EXT
BZ STOP
ENT BZ STOP
ENT
Example of displaying generated time 2 Example of displaying generated time 3

YOKOGAWA
YOKOGAWA
RUN RUN
EXT EXT
EXT EXT
BZ STOP
ENT BZ STOP
ENT

Accessing Outputting simulated
maintenance mode DAC signal
Menu display Maint.MENU Maint.MENU Maint.MENU
of 30 Password 30 Password 30 Password A
maintenance 31 DAC Dummy 31 DAC Dummy
mode 32 Rotate MC 32 Rotate MC
ENT ENT
Menu display,
incase maintenance
mode has been Please input HDG 0.00V
inhibited. maintenance
password.
00000 DAC Dummy
ENT ENT
Please input
maintenance
HDG 0.00V QUAD 0.00V ROT1 0.00V ROT2 0.00V ROT3 0.00V
password.
00000
DAC Dummy DAC Dummy DAC Dummy DAC Dummy DAC Dummy
ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT
ENT
HDG 0.00V QUAD 0.00V ROT1 0.00V ROT2 0.00V ROT3 0.00V
Please input
maintenance
DAC Dummy DAC Dummy DAC Dummy DAC Dummy DAC Dummy
password.
*****
Enter
ENT simulated
voltage value
ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT
Password is Maintenance
denied. command is HDG 1.00V QUAD 2.00V ROT1 3.00V ROT2 4.00V ROT3 5.00V
Try again. available.
ENT ENT DAC Dummy DAC Dummy DAC Dummy DAC Dummy DAC Dummy
ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT
IM80B10M-17E
From any screen
COMMAND
Normal mode

4-47
 The operation flow diagram of the maintenance function (C.operation unit) ···1/5
Manual drive of Manual drive of Resetting
master compass repeater compass gyrosphere runtime
4-48
Maint.MENU
IM80B10M-17E
Midium Maint.MENU Maint.MENU
classifi- 30 Password 33 Rotate RC 33 Rotate RC B
cation A 31 DAC Dummy 34 Reset RT 34 Reset RT
menu 32 Rotate MC 35 Reset LOG 35 Reset LOG
ENT ENT ENT
Angular SPD Angular SPD G1 012345hr

00 deg/s 0.0 deg/s G2 123456hr
Gyro=G1 Gyro=G1
Rotate MC Rotate RC Code=00000

ENT ENT ENT
Angular SPD
0.0 deg/s G1 012345hr G1 012345hr G1 012345hr
Angular SPD Angular SPD Angular SPD
00 deg/s 00 deg/s 00 deg/s G2 123456hr G2 123456hr G2 123456hr
Rotate RC Gyro=G1 Gyro=G2 Gyro= G1/G2
Gyro=G1 Gyro= G2 Gyro=G1/G2
Rotate MC Rotate MC Rotate MC Code=00000 Code=00000 Code=00000
ENT ENT
Angular SPD
Angular SPD 0.6 deg/s G1 012345hr
00 deg/s G2 123456hr
Gyro=G1 Rotate RC Gyro=G1
Rotate MC Code=00000
Select rotating speed

0.0 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.5 0.6 1.2

1.8 2.4 3.0 -0.1 -0.2 -0.3 -0.4
-0.5 -0.6 -1.2 -1.8 -2.4 -3.0
Enter password
Angular SPD
with arrow keys. ENT
-12 deg/s
Gyro=G1 G1 012345hr
Rotate MC G2 123456hr
ENT Gyro=G1
Code=*****
From any screen ENT
Select rotating speed
00 01 02 04 05 06 12
18 24 30 -01 -02 -03 -04 COMMAND
G1 000000hr
-05 -06 -12 -18 -24 -30
G2 123456hr
Normal mode Gyro=G1
Code=END
ENT
Resetting logging data Initializing backup memory
Midium Maint.MENU Maint.MENU
classifi- 33 Rotate RC 36 INIT MEM
cation B 34 Reset RT 37 INST ERR
C
menu 35 Reset LOG 38 reserved
ENT ENT
Unit=OP Unit=OP
Log =Error Code=00000
Code=00000
Reset LOG INIT MEM
ENT ENT
Unit=OP Unit=G1 Unit=G2 Unit=OP Unit=G1 Unit=G2

Log =Error Log =Error Log =Error Code=00000 Code=00000 Code=00000
Code=00000 Code=00000 Code=00000
Reset LOG Reset LOG Reset LOG INIT MEM INIT MEM INIT MEM
ENT
ENT
Unit=OP
Unit=OP Unit=OP Code=00000
Log =Error Log =Command
Code=00000 Code=00000 INIT MEM
Reset LOG Reset LOG
ENT
Unit=OP Enter password ENT

Log =Error
Code=00000 Unit=OP
Reset LOG Code=*****
Enter password INIT MEM

ENT
ENT
Unit=OP
Unit= OP Code=END
Log = Error
Code= ***** INIT MEM
IM80B10M-17E
Reset LOG
ENT
ENT
Unit= OP
Log = Error
Code= END
Reset LOG
ENT

4-49
Correcting installation error
Maint.MENU
4-50
MIdium
classfi- C 36 INIT MEM D
IM80B10M-17E
cation 37 INST ERR
menu 38 reserved
ENT From any screen
REL +000.0 COMMAND

REL +000.0
Gyro=G1 Normal mode
INST ERR
ENT

REL +000.0 REL +000.0 REL +000.0
REL +000.0 REL +000.0 REL +000.0
Gyro= G1 Gyro= G2 Gyro= G1/G2
INST ERR INST ERR INST ERR
1
ENT ENT ENT
INST ERR INST ERR INST ERR INST ERR INST ERR INST ERR INST ERR INST ERR
ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT
REL +012.3 ABS 123.4 REL +000.0 REL +000.0 1 REL +012.3 REL +012.3
REL +000.0 REL +000.0 REL +012.3 ABS 123.4 REL +012.4 ABS 123.4
Gyro=G1 Gyro=G1 Gyro=G2 Gyro=G2 Gyro=G1/G2 Gyro=G1/G2
INST ERR INST ERR INST ERR INST ERR INST ERR INST ERR
ENT ENT ENT
Displaying logged data
Midium Maint.MENU
classifi- D 37 INST ERR
cation 38 reserved
menu 39 LOG REF
ENT
From any screen
Unit=OP Err
COMMAND Num =
Code=
Time=
Normal mode
ENT
Unit= OP Err Unit= G1 Err Unit= G2 Err

Num = Num = Num =
Code= Code= Code=
Time= Time= Time=
ENT
Unit=OP Err Unit=OP Com

Num = Num =
Code= Code=
Time= Time=
1 2
ENT ENT
Unit=OP Err Unit=OP Com Unit=OP Err Unit=OP Com

Num =10 Num =025 Num =01 Num =001
Code=095 Code=1000 Code=151 Code=2802
Time=012345 Time=001234 Time=000012 Time=000010
Unit=OP Err Unit=OP Com Unit=OP Err Unit=OP Com
IM80B10M-17E
Num =09 Num =024 Num =00 Num =000
Code=090 Code=2001 Code=090 Code=3701

Time=001234 Time=001233 Time=000012 Time=000001
ENT
1 2

4-51
 The operation flow diagram of themaintenance function (C.operation unit) ···5/5
 The operation flow diagram of the maintenance function (M.operation unit) ···1/4
Permission for Outputing simulated Manual drive of Manual drive of
maintenance function DAC signals master compass repeater compass
+'*
UP SHIFT UP UP SHIFT UP SHIFT
48$'

UP UP
527
0DQXDOGULYHRIPDVWHUFRPSDVV
([DPSOHRIWKHGLVSOD\ZKHQWKHŸNH\RUźNH\
GYRO HEADING
is pressed.
GYRO HEADING
accelerates㸦Ÿ㸧㸸ĺĺĺĺĺĺ
ĺĺĺĺ
COMMAND DATA COMMAND DATA decelerates㸦ź㸧㸸ĺĺĺĺĺĺ
ĺĺĺĺ
SHIFT
press for UP
ENT 2 seconds
527
0DQXDOGULYHRIUHSHDWHUFRPSDVV
([DPSOHRIWKHGLVSOD\ZKHQWKHŸNH\RUźNH\
GYRO HEADING
GYRO HEADING is pressed.
Accelerates㸦Ÿ㸧㸸ĺĺĺĺĺ
ĺĺĺĺĺ
COMMAND DATA
COMMAND DATA Decelerates㸦ź㸧㸸ĺĺĺĺĺ
UP ĺĺĺĺĺ
ENT press for
2 seconds 527
GYRO HEADING
GYRO HEADING
COMMAND DATA
COMMAND DATA
UP SHIFT
ENT press for

2 seconds
GYRO HEADING
If password is incorrect then
the decimal point is not displayed.
COMMAND DATA
UP SHIFT
COMMAND
GYRO HEADING
COMMAND DATA
press for ENT

SHIFT
2 seconds
Channel number Entered value
press for ENT

2 seconds

Resetting gyrosphere Initializing backup memory Resetting logged data
running time (Logged error data) (Logged command data)
GYRO HEADING SHIFT GYRO HEADING

UP SHIFT UP SHIFT
ENT Press for
2 seconds
GYRO HEADING
COMMAND DATA
UP SHIFT
UP UP
‫ڸ‬
GYRO HEADING
COMMAND DATA
UP
SHIFT Press for SHIFT

Press for
ENT
2 seconds
ENT 2 seconds
GYRO HEADING
COMMAND DATA
SHIFT
Press for
ENT Press for Press for ENT 2 seconds
ENT
2 seconds 2 seconds
GYRO HEADING
COMMAND DATA
ENT Press for
ENT Press for ENT Press for 2 seconds
2 seconds 2 seconds
if password is incorrect then GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA
Press for
ENT
2 seconds
if password is incorrect then


Correcting master compass
installation-error
Relative value correction Absolute value correction
GYRO HEADING EXT GYRO HEADING
Press for
COMMAND DATA 2 seconds COMMAND DATA
UP SHIFT UP SHIFT
SHIFT
ENT
Press for ENT
SHIFT
2 seconds
ENT
Press for ENT
2 seconds
Press for
ENT ENT
2 seconds
Example of the setting value Example of the setting value

AE : -123.4° AH : 234.5°

Displaying logged data

(Logged error data) (Logged command data)
ENT Press for 2 seconds ENT Press for 2 seconds
(Logged data number) (Logged data number)
GYRO HEADING UP GYRO HEADING GYRO HEADING UP GYRO HEADING

SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT
(Upper two digits

(logged data code) of logged data code)

SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT
SHIFT
(Upper two digits of the (Lower two digits of

time of logged data) logged data code)
UP GYRO HEADING UP GYRO HEADING

(Intermediate two digits of (Upper two digits of the

the time of logged data) time of logged data)

(lower two digits (Intermediate two digits

of the time of logged data) of the time of logged datae)

(lower two digits

of the time of logged data)
under displaying the logged data UP

ENT
Press for 2 seconds
SHIFT SHIFT
under displaying the logged data
Press for 2 seconds ENT

4.4 Generation Function

This section describes the functions that facilitate communication with input / output devices con-
nected to the CMZ900. The generation functions are divided into two groups : command functions
with codes of 40’s and settings with the dip switches. When command codes of 40’s in the command
functions are to be used, enable the generation functions as shown in section 4.4.1.
CAUTION
Only technicians of the Service department of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd. are authorized to
implement the operations and other work described in this chapter. However, if for some reason the
service department of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. permits you to perform these operations, be
sure to follow the instructions described in this section.
The generation functions include the following:
Operation Execution
Command unit Function item during Page
code
Standby
C M

NOTE
After changing the settings, restart the gyro system.

4.4.1 Permission for Generation Function

COMMAND CODE : 40
The generation function is protected by password to reject mis-operation.
The command code “40” is the function to check password.
NOTE

Selecting “40 Password” from the Generat.
MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the
GYRO 1 >123.4 Please input
display for entering a password (as shown in the
upper figure on the right). GYRO 2 123.4 generation
Press the ENT key again. The ones digit of “00000”
EXT 126.0 password.
blinks, prompting you to enter a password.
Press the right and left arrow keys to change the 00000
blinking digit, and press the upper and lower ar-
row keys to change the numeric value.
After entering the correct password “XXXXX”,
press the ENT key. All the digits blink for GYRO 1 >123.4 Generation
confirmation.
GYRO 2 123.4 command is
Press the ENT key again. If the password is cor-
rectly entered, the generation functions are ena- EXT 126.0 available.
bled (as shown in the lower figure on the right).
When a wrong password is entered, the ones
digit of “00000” blinks again, prompting you to
reenter a password.
The generation functions are disabled by default whenever the power is turned on,

Executing the command code “40” displays “00” in the
data display, in which the tens digit (digit to be entered) is YOKOGAWA
blinking.
Press the SHIFT key to change the blinking digit, and then RUN
change the displayed code to “XX” using the UP key. EXT
After entering the code, the entered value blinks if the FAIL GYRO HEADING
operator to confirm the value. If the ENT key is pressed EXT
for another 2 seconds, the entered value is displayed COMMAND DATA
continuously and the generation functions are enabled SHIFT UP COMMAND
(in which the decimal point is displayed after the least BZ STOP
ENT
significant digit of the command display).
SET/ DIMMER
If permission is denied then press ENT key for 2 second,
and enter the code again.
normal.
The figure on the right shows an example of displaying the state in which the generation functions
are enabled.
When it turns on the power supply again the generation function is refused.

4.4.2 Setting the Follow-up Speed for Stepper Signal

COMMAND CODE : 41
This function sets the limit values of angular speed and angular acceleration speed of stepper-signal.
Initial Value
Follow-up Speed Angular Limit: 24 °/s
Follow-up Acceleration Angular Limit: 140 °/s2

Selecting “41 Stepper” from the Generat. MENU
and pressing the ENT key switches to the display GYRO 1 >123.4 24 °/s
showing the current settings for the maximum
GYRO 2 123.4 0140 °/s/s
follow-up angular speed on line 1, and the maxi-
mum follow-up angular acceleration on line 2. EXT 126.0 Gyro=G1/G2
The figure on the right shows the standard settings.
Stepper
Press the ENT key . The tens digit of the angular
speed blinks.
Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking digit and press the upper and lower arrow
After entering the angular speed (00 to 99), press the ENT key. All the digits blink for confirmation.
Press the ENT key again. The angular speed stops blinking and the thousands digit of the angular
acceleration blinks.
Enter the angular acceleration (0000 to 9999) in the same way and press the ENT key. All the
digits blink for confirmation.
Press the ENT key once more. The angular acceleration stops blinking and the settings finally
change to the values you set.

The command code “41” is executed, the data display indi-
cates “SL”, the gyro heading display indicates the maximum YOKOGAWA
follow-up speed. If SHIFT key is pressed the display con-

tents changes to the maximum follow-up acceleration and RUN
the data display indicates “AL”, the gyro heading display EXT
indicates the maximum follow-up acceleration. FAIL GYRO HEADING
“SL” : Setting of follow-up Speed Limit (00 to 99)
EXT
“AL” : Setting of follow-up Acceleration Limit (0000 to 9999)
COMMAND DATA
The figure on the right shows an example of displaying SHIFT UP COMMAND
the maximum follow-up acceleration of 140 °/s2. BZ STOP
ENT
If the EXT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds, the left SET/ DIMMER
digit of the data display blinks.
To change the digit, press the SHIFT key and then change
the numeric value of the digit by pressing the UP key.
After entering the setting value, the entered value blinks if the ENT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds
to enable the operator to confirm the value. If the ENT key is pressed for another 2 seconds, the

4.4.3 Setting Communication Protocol of Output Port

COMMAND CODE : 42
This function sets the protocol of the serial output ports which output the signal to external unit.
The gyrocompass system has four serial output ports, and a different communication protocol can
be set for each.
The gyrocompass system has three serial output ports, (or four serial ports, if the C.operation unit
is used) and a different communication protocol can be set for each.

Selecting “42 Out Port” from the Generat. MENU
play for selecting a port number (as shown in the GYRO 1 >123.4 P=1 4800 bps
figure on the right).
GYRO 2 123.4 P=2 4800 bps
Press the ENT key again. The port number “1”
blinks. EXT 126.0 P=3 4800 bps
Press the upper and lower arrow keys to change
P=4 4800 bps
the port number (1 to 4).
After selecting the port, press the ENT key. The
port number stops blinking and the baud rate
blinks.
Press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the baud rate (4800 bps or 38400 bps).
After selecting the baud rate, press the ENT key.
The port number blinks for confirmation.
Press the ENT key once more. The port number stops blinking and the communication protocol
settings finally change to the values you set.
NOTE
The baud rate of port 1 is fixed to 4800 bps.

NOTE

4.4.4 Setting Format of Output Port

COMMAND CODE : 43
This function sets the communication format of the serial output signal.
The gyrocompass has three serial output ports. Three records can be set to each port. And different
format can be set to each port for gyro heading and external heading.
The format is set for gyro heading selected.
Record 1
Gyro heading
Record 2
(GYRO)
Port 1 Record 3
to
Port 4 Record 1
External azimuth
Record 2
(EXT) *1)
Record 3
*1) Only format setting of the gyro heading is possible at port 4.
There are two types of format setting: ready-made formats and new formats.
 Ready-made formats:
The gyrocompass has several ready-made format.
One of the ready-made format (see following table) can be set to each record.
Data Ready-made Format

Heading (HDG) $**HDT, $**HDG, $**HDM, $**THS
Rate of turn (ROT) $**ROT
Heading / Rate of turn (HDG / ROT) $**HRC, $HEHRC, $HCHRC,$PYDKH
Integrity status $PYDK *2)
*2) It is only a case of the ship which apply DNV NAUTICAL SAFTY (rule in July 2010) that this setence is outputted.
See appendix-5 about outline of ready-made format.
 New formats:
If ready-made format can not be used for connecting with external unit , it is possible to generate
new format.
 Create a new HDG format

• Input the address field (Taker ID, Data ID).
• Input the number of data field to use.
• Input the starting position of data field No.(number of commas) for heading.
• Select the using of checksum.(with or without)
• Select the types of heading data. In case of the gyro heading output, T:True. In case of the
external azimuth output, M:Magnetic or “ “ : NULL.

Example of a new HDG format (number of data = 5,starting position=2)

Field Number 1 2 3 4 5
Character $ x x x x x , , xxx.x , T , , * hh
Talker ID Data ID Heading T=True Checksum

[degrees] M=Magnetic
Fixed length “ ” =NULL
Header Checksum
Identifier
< CR > < LF >
Terminator
 Create a new ROT format

• Input the starting position of data field No.(number of commas) for ROT.
• Select the unit of ROT. (°/min, °/s)
• Select whether or not to use the data status field. (ON or OFF)
Example of a new ROT format (number of data=4,starting position=1)
Data Field Number 1 2 3 4
Character $ x x x x x , xxxx.x , A , , * hh
Talker ID Data ID Status:

Rate of turn Checksum
A=Data valid
–/0000.0
V=Data invalid
Header [deg/min ] Checksum
“ ” =NULL
–/ 00.00 Identifier
[deg/s ]
< CR > < LF > "–" means
bow turns to port
Terminator Fixed length
 Create a new HDG/ROT format

• Input the starting position of data field for heading.
• Input the starting position of data field No.(number of commas) for ROT.
• Select the types of heading data. In case of the gyro heading output, T:True. In case of the
external azimuth output, M:Magnetic or “ “ : NULL.
• Select the unit of ROT. (°/min, °/s)
• Select whether or not to use the data status field. (ON or OFF)
Example of a new HDG/ROT format(number of data=6, starting position [HDG]=1, starting position [ROT]=4)
Data Field Number 1 2 3 4 5 6
&KDUDFWRU $ x x x x x , xxx.x , T , , xxxx.x , A , * hh
Talker ID Data ID Heading T=True Rate of turn Status: Checksum

[degrees] M=Magnetic –/0000.0 A=Data valid
Fixed lingth ””=NULL [deg/min] V=Data invalid
Header Checksum
–/ 00.00 “”NULL Identifier
< CR > < LF > [deg/s]
“–” means
Terminator bow turns to port


Selecting “43 Out Form” from the Generat.
MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the GYRO 1 >123.4 Port=1 Rec=1
display for setting the communication formats for
serial output ports (as shown in the upper figure GYRO 2 123.4 GYRO
on the right).
EXT 126.0
 Selecting the output port, record

number, and types
Press the ENT key, then the port “1” blinks.
GYRO 1 >123.4 Port=1 Rec=1
the port number (1 to 4)(*1), and press the ENT GYRO 2 123.4 GYRO
key. The port number stops blinking and the
record “1” blinks. EXT 126.0 HDG
*1: Only format setting of the gyro heading is possible at port 4.
Already
the record number (1 to 3), and press the ENT
key. The record number stops blinking and the output heading “GYRO” blinks.
Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the output heading (GYRO or EXT), and press the
ENT key. The output heading stops blinking and the data type “HDG” blinks.
Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the data type (HDG, ROT, HDG/ROT, or NONE),
and press the ENT key. When NONE is selected here, no data is output for the selected port, record
number, or output heading. When other type is selected, then Already/New blinks on line 4.
Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the type of format, and press the ENT key. When
Already is selected here, then go to “Selecting a ready-made format” When New is selected, then
go to “Creating a new format”.
 Selecting a ready-made format

The display shows the current settings (as
shown in the figure on the right) and the current
ready-made format blinks. GYRO 1 >123.4 P=1 R=1 GYRO
Press the upper and lower arrow keys to se- GYRO 2 123.4 $**HDT
lect a format. The selectable ready-made for-
mats depend on the data type. See the table EXT 126.0 T=1000 ms
on page 4-58.
After selecting a ready-made format, press the
ENT key. The format stops blinking and the cur-
rent communication period blinks.
Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the communication period (20ms (*1) / 200ms /
500ms / 1000ms). *1: Only at 38400bps
After entering the communication period, press the ENT key. The output port, record number, and
output format finally change to the selected settings.

 Creating a new format

The display shows the current settings (as
shown in the figure on the right) and the second
leftmost character of the header blinks. GYRO 1 >123.4 P=1 R=1 GYRO
Press the right and left arrow keys to change the GYRO 2 123.4 $HEXXX
blinking character (except for $), and press the
upper and lower arrow keys to change the letter EXT 126.0 T=1000 ms
(A to Z, cyclic).
Dat Num= 00
After entering the header, press the ENT key.
and communication period blinks.
the communication period (20ms (*1) / 200ms / 500ms / 1000ms). *1: Only at 38400bps
After entering the communication period, press the ENT key. and the tens digit of the number of
data items (Dat Num) blinks.
After entering the number of data items, press the ENT key.
The display shows the current settings for the selected data type.
· Example of creating an HDG format

The figure on the right shows an example of
selecting HDG for the data type.
GYRO 1 >123.4 P=1 R=1 GYRO
The tens digit of the starting position (Str Pos)
blinks. Press the right and left arrow keys to GYRO 2 123.4 Str Pos= 00
change the blinking digit, and press the upper
and lower arrow keys to change the numeric EXT 126.0 Ck Sum = ON
value.
True
After entering the starting position, press the
ENT key. All the digits blink for confirmation.
Press the ENT key again. The starting position
stops blinking and the designation for use of the check sum (Ck Sum) blinks. Press the upper and
lower arrow keys to select on/off.
After selecting the check sum, press the ENT key. The check sum stops blinking and the True/Mag-
netic blinks.
Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select True, Magnetic, or None, and press the ENT key.
The new format (heading) for the selected output port, record number, and output heading is fi-
nally confirmed.

· Example of creation an ROT format

of selecting ROT for the data type.
GYRO 1 >123.4 P=1 R=1 GYRO
The tens digit of the starting position (Str Pos)
blinks. Press the right and left arrow keys to GYRO 2 123.4 Str Pos= 02
change the blinking digit, and press the upper
and lower arrow keys to change the numeric
EXT 126.0 Ck Sum = ON
value. °/min
ENT key. All the digits blink for confirmation.
stops blinking and the designation for use of the GYRO 1 >123.4 P=1 R=1 GYRO
check sum blinks. Press the upper and lower
arrow keys to select on/off. GYRO 2 123.4 A/V = ON
After selecting the check sum, press the ENT EXT 126.0
key. The check sum stops blinking and the unit
blinks.
a unit (°/min or °/s), and press the ENT key. The
designation for use of the A/V status blinks as shown in the lower figure on the right.
Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select on/off, and press the ENT key. The new format
(rate of turn) for the selected output port, record number, and output heading is finally confirmed.
· Example of creation a HDG/ROT format

The upper figure on the right is an example of
selecting HDG/ROT for the data type. The
GYRO 1 >123.4 P=1 R=1 GYRO
display shows the current settings of starting
positions of the heading (HDG Pos) and the GYRO 2 123.4 HDG Pos= 01
rate of turn (ROT Pos), and the designation
for use of the check sum. Set all the items as EXT 126.0 ROT Pos= 03
in the case of the HDG and ROT.
Ck Sum = ON
After selecting the check sum, the display
changes as shown in the lower figure on the
right. Set all the items likewise. When all of
the settings are completed, the new format
(heading/rate of turn) for the selected output GYRO 1 >123.4 P=1 R=1 GYRO
port, record number, and output heading is
finally confirmed. GYRO 2 123.4 True
EXT 126.0 °/min
A/V = ON

NOTE

4.4.5 Setting Format of Input Port

COMMAND CODE : 45
This function sets the communication format of the input signals which are position, speed and
heading/ROT sent from external unit.
Heading and ROT input:
The heading and ROT signal formats can be set to three ports. The ROT signal can not set to dif-
ferent port from the heading signal.
Position input:
The position signal format can be set to one port. This function is invalid by ship which apply DNV
NAUTICAL SAFTY(rule in July 2010).
Speed input:
The speed signal format can be set to one port. The speed signal can be selected from the serial
signal or pulse signal. This function is invalid by ship which apply DNV NAUTICAL SAFTY(rule in
July 2010).
There are two types of serial signal format settings: ready-made formats (see the table below) and
new formats (according to the basic format below).
 Ready-made format:
The gyrocompass has several ready-made format.
One of the ready-made format (see following table) can be set to each record.
Data Ready-made Format

Ship’s speed (SPD) VMVSD, VBW, VHW, VTG
Latitude (LAT) GGA, GLL
Heading (HDG) HDT, HDG, HDM, HRC, THS
Rate of turn (ROT) ROT, HRC
See appendix-5 about outline of ready-made format.
 New formats:
If ready-made format can not be used for connecting with external unit, it is possible to generate
new format.
 Create a new SPD format

• Input the starting position of data field No.(number of commas) for speed.
• Select the unit of speed. (knot or km/hr)

Example of a new SPD format (starting position = 2, unit=KNOT)
Data field Number

Character
Talker ID Data ID Speed [knot] Checksum
Header Checksum
identifier
< CR > < LF >
Terminator
 Create a new LAT format

• Input the starting position of data field No.(number of commas) for latitude.
Example of a new LAT format (start position=1)

Data Field Number 1 2 3
Character $ x x x x x , aabb.cc , x , * hh
Talker ID Data ID Latitude N/S Checksum

aa:[degrees]
aabb:Fixed length
Checksum
Header Identifier
< CR > < LF >
Terminator
 Create a new HDG format

• Input the starting position of data field No.(number of commas) for heading.
• Select whether or not to receive the ROT. If "NONE" is selected, the ROT is calculated from
heading.
Example of a new HDG format (start position=3)
Data field number 1 2 3
Character $ x x x x x , , , x.x * hh
Talker ID Data ID Heading

Checksum
[degrees]
Checksum
Header
Identifier
< CR > < LF >
Terminator


Selecting “45 In Form” from the Generat. MENU
and pressing the ENT key switches to the dis- GYRO 1 >123.4 SPD Port= 3
play showing the current settings for the com-
munication formats for serial intput ports. The GYRO 2 123.4 LAT Port= 2
right figure is an example of a display in the ship
which does not apply DNV NAUTICAL SAFTY( EXT 126.0 HDG P1,P2
rule in July 2010).
It is indicating three things, speed data input from
port 3, position (latitude) data input from port 2,
and the heading data input from ports 1 and 2.
Press the ENT key, then the ship’s speed input port (SPD) blinks.
Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the port (1 to 3, P, or “-”). Select P for the ship’s
speed pulse input and “-” if there is no input for the ship’s speed. After selecting the port, press the
ENT key. The ship’s speed input port stops blinking and the ship’s position input port (LAT) blinks.
Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the port (1 to 3, or “-”). Choose “-” if there is no input
for the ship’s position. After selecting the port, press the ENT key. The ship’s position input port
stops blinking and SPD blinks.
Press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the blinking item and select the data type (SPD,
LAT, or HDG).
When selecting SPD (for the input ports 1 to 3 only) and pressing the ENT key, then go to “ Cre-
ating a ship’s speed format”.
When selecting LAT (for the input ports 1 to 3 only) and pressing the ENT key, then go to “ Creat-
ing a ship’s position format”.
When selecting HDG and pressing the ENT key, then go to “ Setting serial input ports for
heading”.
NOTE
In the case of the ship which apply DNV NAUTICAL SAFTY(rule in July 2010), the input port and
input sentence of speed and latitude are reserved beforehand.
Only a heading can be set up.

 Creating a ship’s speed format

selecting SPD for the data type. GYRO 1 >123.4 SPD Port= 3
Already/New blinks. Press the upper and lower GYRO 2 123.4 Already
arrow keys to select the type of format, and
press the ENT key. EXT 126.0 $VMVSD
When Already is selected here, the current
ready-made format blinks on line 3. Press the
upper and lower arrow keys to select a ready-
made format and press the ENT key. The selected format is finally confirmed.
When New is selected, the display changes as shown in the lower figure on the right.
The second leftmost character of the header blinks. Press the right and left arrow keys to change
the blinking character (except for $), and press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the letter
(A to Z, cyclic).
After entering the header, press the ENT key. All
the characters blink for confirmation.
GYRO 1 >123.4 SPD Port= 3
Press the ENT key again. The header stops
blinking and the tens digit of the starting position GYRO 2 123.4 $VMXXX
(Str Pos) blinks. Press the right and left arrow
keys to change the blinking digit, and press the EXT 126.0 Str Pos= 01
upper and lower arrow keys to change the nu-
meric value. Ck Sum = ON
After entering the starting position, press the ENT key. All the digits blink for confirmation.
Press the ENT key again. The starting position stops blinking and the designation for use of the
check sum (Ck Sum) blinks. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select on/off.
After selecting the check sum, press the ENT
key. The display changes as shown in the upper
figure on the right. and the unit blinks. GYRO 1 >123.4 SPD Port= 3
Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select GYRO 2 knot
a unit (Knot or Km/hr), and press the ENT key.
The new format of ship’s speed is finally con- EXT 126.0
firmed.

 Creating a ship’s position format

selecting LAT for the data type.
GYRO 1 >123.4 LAT Port= 2
GYRO 2 123.4 Already
Already/New blinks. Press the upper and lower
arrow keys to select the type of format, and EXT 126.0 $**GLL
press the ENT key.
When Already is selected here, the current
ready-made format blinks on line 3. Press the
upper and lower arrow keys to select a ready-
made format and press the ENT key. The selected format is finally confirmed.
When New is selected, the display changes as shown in the upper figure on the right.
the blinking character (except for $), and press
the upper and lower arrow keys to change the
letter (A to Z, cyclic).
GYRO 1 >123.4 LAT Port= 2
After entering the header, press the ENT key. All
the characters blink for confirmation. GYRO 2 123.4 $HEXXX
Press the ENT key again. The header stops EXT 126.0 Str Pos= 00
blinking and the tens digit of the starting position
(Str Pos) blinks. Press the right and left arrow Ck Sum = ON
keys to change the blinking digit, and press the
upper and lower arrow keys to change the nu-
meric value.
After entering the starting position, press the ENT key. All the digits blink for confirmation.
Press the ENT key again. The starting position stops blinking and the designation for use of the
check sum (Ck Sum) blinks. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select on/off.
After selecting the check sum, Press the ENT key . The new format of ship’s position is finally
confirmed.

 Setting serial input ports for heading

of selecting HDG for the data type.
GYRO 1 >123.4 HDG Port= 1
The display shows whether the heading is input
to the serial ports 1 to 3. Either SET (yes) or GYRO 2 123.4 Port-1 SET
NONE (no) is displayed.
EXT 126.0 Port-2 SET
When the port number for heading input blinking,
select the port number using up and down key. Port-3 NONE
After select, press ENTER key.
When the state of selected port blinks, select the
‘SET’ or ‘NONE’ using up and down key. After
select, press ENTER key.
If ‘NONE’ is selected, the selecting screen of port GYRO 1 >123.4 HDG Port= 3
number is displayed again.
GYRO 2 123.4 Already
If ‘SET’ is selected, the screen displays a right
example figure. EXT 126.0 $**HDM
$**ROT=NONE
Already/New blinks. Press the upper and lower
arrow keys to select the type of format, and press
the ENT key.
When Already is selected here, the current ready-made format blinks on line 3. Press the upper
and lower arrow keys to select a ready-made format and press the ENT key. The ROT input status
blinks on line 4, Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select SET or NONE.
After selecting the ROT input status ,press the ENT key.
The selected format is finally confirmed.
NOTE
When the selection of ROT signal is set to “NONE”, the ROT is calculated using received heading.
When New is selected, the display changes as shown in the upper figure on the next page.
the blinking character (except for $), and press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the letter
(A to Z, cyclic).
After entering the header, press the ENT key. All the characters blink for confirmation.
Press the ENT key again. The header stops blinking and the tens digit of the starting position (Str
Pos) blinks. Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking digit, and press the upper
and lower arrow keys to change the numeric value.


ENT key. All the digits blink for confirmation. GYRO 1 >123.4 HDG Port= 3
stops blinking and the designation for use of the GYRO 2 123.4 $HEXXX
check sum (Ck Sum) blinks. Press the upper EXT 126.0 Str Pos= 01
and lower arrow keys to select on/off.
After selecting the check sum, press the ENT Ck Sum = ON
key. The display changes as shown in the lower
figure on the right.
The ROT input status blinks on line 2. Press the
GYRO 1 >123.4 HDG Port= 3
upper and lower arrow keys to select SET or
NONE. GYRO 2 123.4 $**ROT=NONE
After selecting the ROT input status ,press the
EXT 126.0
ENT key. The selected format is finally con-
firmed.

NOTE

4.4.6 Miscellaneous
COMMAND CODE : 49
This function executes the ON/OFF setting of following functions.
 Mute function
If this function is set to ON, the buzzer is made to mute while any alarm are generated. This func-
tion is used when the gyrocompass is connected to the center alarm unit.
 Bow Swap Function

If this function is set to ON, the heading signals are reversed by 180 degrees while being input the
inverse contact signal.

Selecting ”49 Misc.” from the Generat.MENU
and press the ENT key switches to the display GYRO 1 >123.4 Mute =OFF
for Miscellaneous function.
GYRO 2 123.4 Bow Swap=OFF
Press ENT key again .
The MUTE blinks. press the upper and lower EXT 126.0 System =TCS
arrow keys to select the MUTE function (MUTE) Misc.
or the Bow swap Function (Bow swap).
After selecting a function, press the ENT key.
The current settings of the selection blinks. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select ON/
OFF (MUTE and Bow swap). Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select TSC/HCS(System).
Press ENT key.
NOTE
System settings
When autopilot system is equipped as tracking control system, set to TCS. When autopilot sys-
tem is equipped as heading control system, set to HCS.

NOTE

Accessing generation mode Setting follow-up speed Setting communication
for stepper signal protocol of output port
Menu display Generat.MENU Generat.MENU Generat.MENU Generat.MENU
of generation 40 Password 40 Password 40 Password 40 Password A
mode 41 Stepper 41 Stepper 41 Stepper
42 Out Port 42 Out Port 42 Out Port
ENT ENT ENT
Please input 24°/s P=1 4800bps

generation 0140 °/s/s P=2 4800bps
password. Gyro= G1/G2 P=3 4800bps
00000 Stepper P=4 4800bps
ENT ENT ENT Select port No.
Please input 24°/s

generation 0140 °/s/s
P=1 4800bps P=1 4800bps P=1 4800bps
password. Gyro= G1/G2
P=2 4800bps P=2 4800bps P=2 4800bps
00000 Stepper
P=3 4800bps P=3 4800bps P=3 4800bps
P=4 4800bps P=4 4800bps P=4 4800bps
ENT
ENT ENT ENT P=1 4800bps P=1 4800bps
P=2 4800bps P=2 38400bps
Please input
26°/s 26° /s P=3 4800bps P=3 4800bps
generation
0140°/s/s 0152° /s/s P=4 4800bps P=4 4800bps
password.
Gyro=G1/G2 Gyro=G1/G2
***** ENT
Stepper Stepper
ENT Select baud rate
ENT ENT
Password is Generation
denied. command is 26° /s 26°/s
Try again. available. 0140° /s/s 0152°/s/s
Gyro=G1/G2 Gyro=G1/G2
Stepper Stepper
ENT ENT
ENT
IM80B10M-17E
From any screen
COMMAND
Normal mode
 The operation flow diagram of the generation function (C.operation unit) ···1/7

4-73
Setting format of output port
Generat.MENU
4-74
Midium 1
classifi- A 43 Out Form B
IM80B10M-17E
cation 44 reserved
menu 45 In Form
ENT
From any screen
P=1 R=1 GYRO P=1 R=1 GYRO P=1 R=1 GYRO P=1 R=1 GYRO
COMMAND $**HDT $**HDT $**HDT $**HDT
Port=1 Rec=1 T=1000 ms T= 20 ms T= 200 ms T= 500 ms
GYRO
Normal mode
ENT
ENT

5
Port=1 Rec=1 Port=2 Rec=1 Port= 3 Rec=1 Port=4 Rec=1 Port=1 Rec=1 Port=1 Rec=1
5 GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO EXT
ENT ENT
Port=1 Rec=1 Port=1 Rec=2 Port=1 Rec=3 Port=1 Rec=1 Port=1 Rec=1 Port=1 Rec=1 Port=1 Rec=1
GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO
HDG ROT HDG/ROT NONE
Already Already Already No format
ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT
Port=1 Rec=1 Port=1 Rec=1

Port=1 Rec=1 Port=1 Rec=1 Port=1 Rec=1 Port=1 Rec=1 GYRO GYRO
GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO HDG/ROT HDG/ROT
HDG HDG ROT ROT Already New
Already New Already New ENT ENT 4
ENT ENT 2 ENT ENT
P=1 R=1 GYRO 3

P=1 R=1 GYRO P=1 R=1 GYRO P=1 R=1 GYRO P=1 R=1 GYRO $**ROT
P=1 R=1 GYRO P=1 R=1 GYRO P=1 R=1 GYRO P=1 R=1 GYRO
$**HDT $**HDG $**HDM $**THS T=1000 ms $**HRC $HEHRC $PYDKH
$HCHRC
T=1000 ms T=1000 ms T=1000 ms T=1000 ms T=1000 ms T=1000 ms T=1000 ms T=1000 ms
ENT
ENT ENT
1 1 1
In case sentence was HDG In case sentence was ROT
and method was New and method was New
2 3
P=1 R=1 GYRO P=1 R=1 GYRO

$HEXXX $HEXXX
T=1000 ms T=1000 ms
Dat Num= 00 Dat Num= 00
ENT ENT
P=1 R=1 GYRO P=1 R=1 GYRO P=1 R=1 GYRO P=1 R=1 GYRO P=1 R=1 GYRO P=1 R=1 GYRO P=1 R=1 GYRO P=1 R=1 GYRO
$ABCDE $ABCDE $ABCDE $ABCDE $ABCDE $ABCDE $ABCDE $ABCDE
T=1000 ms T= 20 ms T= 200 ms T= 500 ms T=1000 ms T= 20 ms T= 200 ms T= 500 ms
Dat Num= 00 Dat Num= 00 Dat Num= 00 Dat Num= 00 Dat Num= 00 Dat Num= 00 Dat Num= 00 Dat Num= 00
ENT ENT

$ABCDE $ABCDE
T=1000 ms T=1000 ms
Dat Num= 00 Dat Num= 00

P=1 R=1 GYRO P=1 R=1 GYRO P=1 R=1 GYRO P=1 R=1 GYRO Str Pos= 02 Str Pos= 02
$ABCDE $ABCDE Ck Sum = ON Ck Sum = OFF
Str Pos= 02 Str Pos= 02
T=1000 ms Ck Sum = ON Ck Sum = OFF T=1000 ms °/min °/min
Dat Num= 03 True True Dat Num= 03
ENT
ENT ENT
ENT P=1 R=1 GYRO P=1 R=1 GYRO
P=1 R=1 GYRO P=1 R=1 GYRO Str Pos= 02 Str Pos= 02
Str Pos= 00 Str Pos= 00 Ck Sum = ON Ck Sum = OFF
Ck Sum = ON P=1 R=1 GYRO P=1 R=1 GYRO P=1 R=1 GYRO Ck Sum = ON °/min °/s
True Str Pos= 02 Str Pos= 02 Str Pos= 02 ° /min
Ck Sum = ON Ck Sum = ON Ck Sum = ON ENT
IM80B10M-17E
True Magnetic None P=1 R=1 GYRO P=1 R=1 GYRO
ENT A/V = ON A/V = OFF
P=1 R=1 GYRO 5 P=1 R=1 GYRO

Str Pos= 02 Str Pos= 02
ENT
Ck Sum = ON Ck Sum = ON
True °/min 5
ENT ENT

4-75
In case sentence was HDG/ROT
and method was New
4-76
IM80B10M-17E
$HEXXX HDG Pos= 01
T=1000 ms ROT Pos= 00
Dat Num= 00 Ck Sum = ON
ENT
P=1 R=1 GYRO

HDG Pos= 01
P=1 R=1 GYRO P=1 R=1 GYRO P=1 R=1 GYRO P=1 R=1 GYRO ROT Pos= 03
$ABCDE $ABCDE $ABCDE $ABCDE Ck Sum = ON
T=1000 ms T= 20 ms T= 200 ms T= 500 ms ENT
Dat Num= 00 Dat Num= 00 Dat Num= 00 Dat Num= 00
ENT P=1 R=1 GYRO P=1 R=1 GYRO

HDG Pos= 01 HDG Pos= 01
P=1 R=1 GYRO
$ABCDE ROT Pos= 03 ROT Pos= 03
Ck Sum = ON Ck Sum = OFF
T=1000 ms
Dat Num= 00
ENT
P=1 R=1 GYRO P=1 R=1 GYRO P=1 R=1 GYRO

True Magnetic None

P=1 R=1 GYRO
°/min ° /min °/min
From any screen $ABCDE
A/V = ON A/V = ON A/V = ON
T=1000 ms
COMMAND Dat Num= 03
ENT
ENT
Command Mode P=1 R=1 GYRO P=1 R=1 GYRO
P=1 R=1 GYRO True True
HDG Pos= 00 °/min °/s
ROT Pos= 00 A/V = ON A/V = ON
Ck Sum = ON
ENT

True True
°/min °/min
P=1 R=1 GYRO A/V = ON A/V = OFF
HDG Pos= 01
ROT Pos= 00 ENT
Ck Sum = ON
5
ENT
㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㪽㫆㫉㫄㪸㫋㩷㫆㪽㩷㫀㫅㫇㫌㫋㩷㫇㫆㫉㫋
㪤㫀㪻㫀㫄㫌㫄
㪻㫃㪸㫊㫊㫀㪽㫀㪄
㪺㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅
㫄㪼㫅㫌
㪦㫅㩷㫊㪿㫀㫇㩷㪺㫆㫉㫉㪼㫊㫇㫆㫅㪻㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㫆㩷㪛㪥㪭㩷㪥㪘㪬㪫㪄㪦㪚㩷㩿㫀㫅㩷㫉㫌㫃㪼㩷㪡㫌㫃㫐㩷㪉㪇㪈㪇㪀㩷
㪦㫅㩷㫊㪿㫀㫇㩷㫅㫆㫋㩷㪺㫆㫉㫉㪼㫊㫇㫆㫅㪻㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㫆㩷
㪛㪥㪭㩷㪥㪘㪬㪫㪄㪦㪚㩷㩿㫀㫅㩷㫉㫌㫃㪼㩷㪡㫌㫃㫐㩷㪉㪇㪈㪇㪀㩷
ͶͿ΅ ͶͿ΅ ͶͿ΅

΄΁͵͑΁ΠΣΥͮ͑͢ ΄΁͵͑΁ΠΣΥͮ͑͢ ͽͲ΅͑΁ΠΣΥͮ͑ͣ ͽͲ΅͑΁ΠΣΥͮ͑ͣ
ͲΝΣΖΒΕΪ ͿͶΈ ͲΝΣΖΒΕΪ ͿͶΈ
͕·;·΄͵ ͕͹ͶΉΉΉ ͕͛͛͸ͽͽ ͕͹ͶΉΉΉ
͹͵͸͑΁ΠΣΥͮ͑͞ ͹͵͸͑΁ΠΣΥͮ͑͢ ͹͵͸͑΁ΠΣΥͮ͑ͣ ͹͵͸͑΁ΠΣΥͮ͑ͤ
΁ΠΣΥ͑͢͞Ϳ΀ͿͶ ΁ΠΣΥ͑͢͞Ϳ΀ͿͶ ΁ΠΣΥ͑͢͞Ϳ΀ͿͶ ΁ΠΣΥ͑͢͞Ϳ΀ͿͶ
ͶͿ΅ ͶͿ΅ ͶͿ΅ ͶͿ΅
΁ΠΣΥͣ͑͞Ϳ΀ͿͶ ΁ΠΣΥͣ͑͞Ϳ΀ͿͶ ΁ΠΣΥͣ͑͞Ϳ΀ͿͶ ΁ΠΣΥͣ͑͞Ϳ΀ͿͶ
΁ΠΣΥͤ͑͞Ϳ΀ͿͶ ΁ΠΣΥͤ͑͞Ϳ΀ͿͶ ΁ΠΣΥͤ͑͞Ϳ΀ͿͶ ΁ΠΣΥͤ͑͞Ϳ΀ͿͶ
ͽͲ΅͑΁ΠΣΥͮ͑ͣ ͽͲ΅͑΁ΠΣΥͮ͑ͣ
΄΁͵͑΁ΠΣΥͮ͑͢ ΄΁͵͑΁ΠΣΥͮ͑͢ ΄΁͵͑΁ΠΣΥͮ͑͢ ΄΁͵͑΁ΠΣΥͮ͑͢ ͲΝΣΖΒΕΪ ͲΝΣΖΒΕΪ
ͶͿ΅
ͲΝΣΖΒΕΪ ͲΝΣΖΒΕΪ ͲΝΣΖΒΕΪ ͲΝΣΖΒΕΪ ͕͛͛͸ͽͽ ͕͛͛͸͸Ͳ
͕·;·΄͵ ͕͛͛·΅͸ ͕͛͛·͹Έ ͕͛͛·ͳΈ ͹͵͸͑΁ΠΣΥͮ͑ͤ ͹͵͸͑΁ΠΣΥͮ͑ͤ
΁ΠΣΥ͑͢͞Ϳ΀ͿͶ ΁ΠΣΥ͑͢͞Ϳ΀ͿͶ
ͶͿ΅ ΁ΠΣΥͣ͑͞Ϳ΀ͿͶ ΁ΠΣΥͣ͑͞Ϳ΀ͿͶ
ͶͿ΅ ΁ΠΣΥͤ͑͞΄Ͷ΅ ΁ΠΣΥͤ͑͞Ϳ΀ͿͶ
ͽͲ΅͑΁ΠΣΥͮ͑ͣ
΄΁͵͑΁ΠΣΥͮ͑͢ ͲΝΣΖΒΕΪ ͶͿ΅
IM80B10M-17E
ͶͿ΅
ͲΝΣΖΒΕΪ ͕͛͛͸ͽͽ
͕͛͛·͹Έ ͹͵͸͑΁ΠΣΥͮ͑ͤ ͹͵͸͑΁ΠΣΥͮ͑ͤ 㪝㫆㫉㫄㩷㪸㫅㫐㩷㫊㪺㫉㪼㪼㫅

ͲΝΣΖΒΕΪ ͿͶΈ
ͶͿ΅ ͕͛͛͹͵; ͕͹ͶΉΉΉ
ʹ΀;;ͲͿ͵
ͶͿ΅ ͕͛͛΃΀΅ͮͿ΀ͿͶ ͕͛͛΃΀΅ͮͿ΀ͿͶ
ͶͿ΅ ͶͿ΅ 㪥㫆㫉㫄㪸㫃㩷㫄㫆㪻㪼


4-77
Setting format of SPD data in New Setting format of LAT data in New Setting format of HDG data in new
10
4-78
7 8
IM80B10M-17E
SPD Port= 1 LAT Port= 2 HDG Port= 3
$HEXXX $HEXXX $HEXXX
Str Pos= 00 Str Pos= 00 Str Pos= 00
Ck Sum = ON Ck Sum = ON Ck Sum = ON
ENT ENT ENT

SPD Port= 1 LAT Port= 2 LAT Port= 2 LAT Port= 2 HDG Port= 3 HDG Port= 3 HDG Port= 3
$ABCDE $ABCDE $ABCDE $ABCDE $ABCDE $ABCDE $ABCDE
Str Pos= 00 Str Pos= 00 Str Pos= 03 Str Pos= 03 Str Pos= 00 Str Pos= 02 Str Pos= 02
Ck Sum = ON Ck Sum = ON Ck Sum = ON Ck Sum = OFF Ck Sum = ON Ck Sum = ON Ck Sum = OFF
ENT
ENT
6
HDG Port= 3 HDG Port= 3
SPD Port= 1 LAT Port= 2 HDG Port= 3 $**ROT= NONE $**ROT= SET
$ABCDE $ABCDE $ABCDE
Str Pos= 01 Str Pos= 03 Str Pos= 02
Ck Sum = ON Ck Sum = ON Ck Sum = ON
ENT
ENT ENT ENT
SPD Port= 1 SPD Port= 1 11
$ABCDE $ABCDE Setting format of HDG data in current
Str Pos= 01 Str Pos= 0 1 9

Ck Sum = ON Ck Sum = OFF
ENT
SPD Port= 1 SPD Port= 1 HDG Port= 3 HDG Port= 3 HDG Port= 3 HDG Port= 3 HDG Port= 3
knot Km/hr Already Already Already Already Already
$**HDM $**HDG $**HDT $**THS $**HRC
$**ROT=NONE $**ROT=NONE $**ROT=NONE $**ROT=NONE $**ROT=NONE
ENT
ENT
6
HDG Port= 3 HDG Port= 3
Already Already
$**HDG $**HDG
$**ROT= NONE $**ROT= SET
ENT
11
㸠΅ʹ΄͑ΠΣ͑͹ʹ΄
㸠΀Ϳ͑ΠΣ͑΀ͷͷ
㸠΀Ϳ͑ΠΣ͑΀ͷͷ
;ΚΤΔΖΝΝΒΟΖΠΦΤ
ͷΦΟΔΥΚΠΟ
ΔΝΒΤΤΚΗΚ͞
;ΚΕΚΦΞ
ΔΒΥΚΠΟ
ΞΖΟΦ

4-80
Permission for Setting of follow-up speed

generation mode for stepper signal
IM80B10M-17E
Follow-up speed limit Follow-up acceleration limit
From any screen
SHIFT COMMAND
BZ STOP
COMMAND DATA COMMAND DATA COMMAND DATA Normal mode

UP SHIFT ENT Press for ENT
2 seconds


UP UP SHIFT UP SHIFT
SHIFT ENT Press for ENT

Press for ENT
2 seconds 2 seconds

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA
ENT Press for ENT
Press for ENT
2 seconds
2 seconds

GYRO HEADING ‫ۂ‬

COMMAND DATA
COMMAND ENT Press for ENT
2 seconds
 The operation flow diagram of the generation function (M.operation unit)
Press for ENT if password is incorrect

2 seconds then the decimal point is Example of the setting Example of the setting
not displayed. 6/ÛV $/ÛV2
4.5 Heading Signal Selection

CMZ900D is composed of two Master compasses. If some error occurs on the system, it is possible
to exchange heading signal between No.1 Master compass and No.2 Master compass.
And If external heading signal is input, gyro compass can select it. If master compass is damaged
seriously, all output signals can be output by using the external signal.
4.5.1 Prohibition of Heading Changeover

If there is large deviation between gyro heading and external heading, the switching of heading
signal under the condition which autopilot is auto navigation mode has the possibility of causing a
rapid course change.
CMZ900 can be limited of heading selection.
CMZ900 can prohibit the switching of heading by using contact signal (*1). (*2)
When changeover of the heading is prohibited, C.operation unit displays "C/O PRF" at the system
status display area.
GYRO 1 >123.4 SPD.MANUAL

GYRO 2 123.4 +00[kn]
C/O PRF N 00[°]
It means prohibition of heading changeover
*1: The contact signal for prohibition of heading changeover

*2: This function can be used if C.operation unit is equipped and connected autopilot can output signal.
 The commands that cannot be executed during prohibition of heading changeover

• Heading selection key (GYRO1/GYRO2/EXT)
• Setting of speed signal (COMMAND 21)
• Setting of latitude signal (COMMAND 22)
• Automatic alignment of master compass (COMMAND 23)
• Manual alignment of master compass (COMMAND 24)

4.5.2 Gyrocompass Heading Changeover Method

In this section, it is described about heading changeover between No.1 Master compass
and No.2 Master compass.
Block diagram to change over Gyrocompass

FAIL
SELECT
GYRO1 BZ STOP
GYRO2
EXT

C.operation unit ADAPTIV / TRACK PILOT
DIMMER / LAMP TEST
MKR040
Software switch
Ship's heading signal Main Gyro
Gyro heading selection key For DNV NAUT-AW [IEC61162-1] Input ADAPTIV
No.2 Unselected heading signal CONTROLER
Auxiliary
Master compass control signal
[IEC61162-1] Input
No.1 JUNCTION UNIT
Master compass control signal (MKN018)
Selected
heading
ECDIS
No.1 U-AIS
MASTER COMPASS Gyro heading change-over GYRO SELECT
MKM026 command sig nal (Contact signal) SWITCH
No.1 VDR
No.1
Master compass
heading signal NOR IAS
NOR
(Repeater serial
No.2 SIGNAL etc.
Serial/Stepper and No.1 CONVERTER
Serial signal
Analog voltage signal) No.2 (MHB306)
OPTION
No.1
Stepper signal
No.2 No.1 RADAR
No.1
No.2 Repeater No.2 RADAR
No.2 Repeater
Master compass serial signal
heading signal No.1
Analog voltage Course Repeater DOPPLER LOG
No.2
(Repeater serial signal(HDG,ROT) recorder
etc.
Serial/Stepper and Repeater
Analog voltage signal) ROT
indicator
No.2 CHANGE-OVER
MASTER COMPASS BD ASSY
MKM026
CONTROL BOX MKC327
There are the following 3 methods as the compass selection of CMZ900D Gyrocompass.
(1) One touch selection with alignment of each compass by the “Gyro heading selector key” on
C.operation unit.
(2) Manual changeover selection by the “Gyro select switch” in Control box.
(3) Gyrocompass automatic changeover function (Option).
(1) Compass selection by Gyro heading selector key

The compass is selected by the C.operation unit. Press the “Gyro heading selector key” (GYRO1
or GYRO2) for 2 seconds to select the desired compass.
Changing to No.2 Master compass : Press GYRO2 key for 2 seconds.
Changing to No.1 Master compass : Press GYRO1 key for 2 seconds.
NOTE
This operation is not possible during prohibition of heading changeover or error-130 .

(2) Manual changeover selection by the “Gyro select switch” in Control box.
If the heading changeover can not be operated because of breakdown of C.operation unit, manu-
al changeover function can be used.
The compass is selected by the “Gyro select switch” in Control Box .
NOTE
At first, confirm that steering mode is manual steering mode.
(Do not change the gyrocompass during automatic steering mode.)
Inside of the Control box
Gyro select switch

Changing to
No.1 No.1 Gyrocompass
NOR
No.2 Changing to
No.2 Gyrocompass
Inside of the Autopilot stand
Set to “NOR” for normal state
NOTE
When C.operation unit works normally, "Gyro select switch" position should be at "NOR". If "Gyro
select switch" is at G1 or G2, error-130 will be generated.
When the compass is selected by the "Gyro select switch", if there is heading deviation between
No.1 and No.2 , the heading gap will occur at the following devices. The devices with the possibil-
ity that heading gap is generated are being connected with stepper signal. For example ECDIS,
RADAR, and CONNING DISPLAY, etc.

(3) Gyrocompass automatic changeover function (Option).

This function can be used only the vessel in which DNV NAUT-AW (rule in 2004) / DNV NAUTICAL
SAFTY (rule in July 2010) or when equipment is required as an option.
If any of the following alarm is occurred at the selected Master compass, C.operation unit outputs
the Gyro heading changeover command signal to the CAHNGE-OVER BD ASSY automatically,
and change the output heading from the selected Master compass to the unselected one.
• Gyro-sphere failure (Error Code: 010)

• Inverter failure (Error Code: 020)
• Phase current failure (Error Code: 021)
• Follow-up failure (Error Code: 050)
• Communication failure (Error Code: 070/071/073/074)
• Power failure in MKC327 (System status: COP1FLT/COP2FLT)
However, the Gyrocompass automatic changeover is not executed under any of the following situ-
ation even if above alarm is occurred.
(a) When the Master compass is in standby.

(b) When the external heading is selected.
(c) When selector switch failure (Error Code: 130) is being occurred.
(d) When the heading deviation is not less than 6 degrees and “the set value of deviation alarm +
1” degrees.
(e)When the alarm which is condition of the Gyrocompass automatic changeover is being occurred
at the unselected Master compass.
(f) When the rate of turn is not less than 200 deg/min at the unselected Master compass.
Also, above (d) (f), “C/O FLT” is displayed at the system status display area and all of the head-
ing signal output from the Master compass is stopped. To restart all of the heading signal output,
change to the unselected Master compass manually.
Heading display Menu and data display

GYRO 2 123.4 +00[kn]
System status display C/O FLT N 00[°]

(4) Heading changeover with speed limit (Option)
This function can be used only the vessel in which DNV NAUTICAL SAFTY (rule in July 2010) or
when equipment is required as an option.
When the Gyrocompass automatic heading changeover is executed, the C. operation unit chang-
es the output heading from the selected Master compass to the unselected one slowly (0.2deg /
sec).

4.5.3 External Heading Changeover Method

The method of external heading changeover is described in this section.
 Changeover to external heading

Press the EXT key over 2 seconds or more on the operation unit to switch the signal from gyro
compass to external device.
• C.operation unit : EXT key
Press the G1/G2 key to return to the gyro heading.
 Selection of external heading device

C.operation unit can input the heading from three different devices or less.
One of them can be selected. Operate the COMMAND 20 to select the external heading device.
GYRO 1 >123.4 >Port-1 OK

GYRO 2 123.4 Port-2 NG
EXT 126.0 Port-3 NONE
EXT HDG SEL
See section 4.2.1 for detail of COMMAND 20.
NOTE
The function that select the external heading device can not be executed at M.operation unit.

4.6 "MUTE" Function of Alarm Sound

It is possible to disable alarm sound by setting of command code 49 function.
(See the section 4.4.6 about command code 49 function.)
This function can be used only when the alarm contacts of Gyrocompass are connected with Bridge
Watch Alarm System (BWAS).
(1) The normal display of C. Operation unit.

Heading display Menu and data display

GYRO 2 123.4 +00[kn]
System status display MUTE N 00[°]
(2) Behaviour at system alarm occurrence


When one of following alarms has occurred at gyrocompass, the "Alarm LED and Buzzer stop
key" of C.operation unit is blinked, the alarm factor is displayed with "Menu and data display"
or "System status display" and the alarm contact is output to BWAS.
• No.1 Power failure alarm
• No.2 Power failure alarm
• Gyrocompass system failure alarm
• Deviation alarm

Gyrocompass failure alarm is occurred with BWAS by alarm contact from gyrocompass.

If the alarm is acknowledge by BWAS, alarm sound is stopped.
NOTE
Check the alarm factor with C.opeartion unit, because the blinking of "Alarm LED and Buzzer stop
key" is continued until pressing this key.

Blank Page
< 5.Troubleshooting > 5-1
5. Troubleshooting
5.1 Advice for Specific Situations

(1) If it is suspected that there is an error in a heading shown by a Repeater compass
or an Autopilot:
Check the settings for the ship’s speed and latitude for correcting speed-error using command
codes 21 and 22. If they are not correct, correct the values.
(See section 4.2.2 and 4.2.3 of this manual.)
Set the ship’s speed to zero and check that indications on the Master compass and Re-
peater compass are the same. If they are not, align the indications of the Repeater com-
pass and Master compass.
(See section 5.3.2 of this manual.)
 Check the accuracy of Master compass heading with using astronomilcal or physical target
observation. If the heading is not accurate, operate the automatic or manual alignment com-
mand.
(See section 4.2.4 and 4.2.5 of this manual.)
(2) If an abnormal sounds can be heard from the Master compass:

Continue to operate the gyro system if there are no errors in indications of the Master and
Repeater compasses.
When there are errors in indications of the Master and Repeater compasses, use the external
azimuth selector switch to set the operation of the system so that the azimuth sensor is se-
lected to “external azimuth.”
(See section 4.5 of this manual.)
*: In either case, Ask your nearest service agent of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd..
(3) If you desire to know the gyrosphere running time:

This can be displayed using the command code 13. However, a correct value cannot be obtained
unless the running time was reset when the gyrosphere was replaced.
(4) If you desire to know the phase current of the gyrosphere:

This can be displayed using the command code 15.
(5) If you desire to implement automatic re-startup using the timer:

The timer can be set using the command code 29.
(6) There is a possibility that abnormality has occurred on the selected device.

5-2 < 5.Troubleshooting >
5.2 Alarm
The gyrocompass system generates an alarm in the following situations.
• The units break down.
• A communication error is generated.
• etc.
This section describes that confirm method and action method of the error content.
Push COMMAND key to

Displayed the error content (C.ope) display normal mode.
Sounding the buzzer Push BZSTOP key to stop the buzzer sounds.
12 Lighting the alarm LED Recovery

Alarm Alarm factor
Alarm factor generation Blinking the alarm LED cancelled?
<(6
Turning off the alarm LED
Operate the COMMAND 26/27

Appended to the current alarm list
to confirm.
Operate the COMMAND 39

Recorded on the error data buffer
to refer the logged error data.
5.2.1 The Display When Alarm has been Generated

The gyrocompass system generates an alarm when an error has been generated.
The buzzer sounds and the alarm LED blinks at that time.
C.operation unit displays cause of alarm at the general display area.
The right figure shows an example that “GYRO
SPHERE FAILURE” is generated.
The buzzer is stopped by pushing the BZ GYRO 1 ---.- GYRO FAILED!
STOP key. If cause of alarm still remains
GYRO 2 123.4 G1:CODE= 010
when BZ STOP key pushed, the alarm LED is
kept turning on. EXT >126.0 Gyro current
If cause of alarm is already cleared when BZ
HDG FLT excess
STOP key pushed, the alarm LED turns off.
If two or more alarms cause, push the right or
left arrow key to display other error factors.
Push the COMMAND key, to display “NORMAL MODE”.
The detail of error code is described in section 5.2.4.

5.2.2 Confirmation of Error Factor

Operate the command 26 or 27 to confirm the error factors.
The error code is displayed by operating above command. If the cause of alarm is already cancelled,
it is possible to delete from error list.
The operation of command 26 is described in section 4.2.6.
The operation of command 27 is described in section 4.2.7.
The contents of error , presumption causes and action method are described in section 5.2.4.
5.2.3 Cancellation of Alarm

The buzzer is stopped by pushing the BZ STOP key. If cause of alarm still remains when BZ STOP
key pushed, the alarm LED is kept turning on.
If cause of alarm is already cleared when BZ STOP key pushed, the alarm LED turns off. The alarm
LED keeps light on until cause of alarm will be cancelled.
To cancel the alarm, refer to the section 5.2.4. The causes of alarm are classified as follows.
 Cancelled by system restoration

When the alarm is generated by temporarily stopping the signal which communicates external
device, the alarm will be cancelled by restoration of signal communication.
 Cancelled by checking the power supply, connected device

When the alarm is generated by down of the power supply or abnormality of connected device, the
alarm will be cancelled by turning on power supply or restarting the connected device.
 Cancelled by manual operation or changing the setting

There are some cases that to cancel the cause of alarm by manual operation or changing the set-
ting. ex) ERROR CODE : 080 , 151
 Cancelled by exchanging to spare parts

If a fuse is cut, the alarm will be cancelled by exchanging to spare fuse.
 The service call is necessary

When a serious breakdown occurs, the service call is necessary for repair.
Ask your nearest service agent of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. to repair or maintain.

5.2.4 Presumption Causes and Countermeasures

If an alarm is generated , confirm the error code and countermeasure with referring the below table.
The operation of command function is described in chapter 4.
If it is not possible to countermeasure by using following method, ask your nearest service agent of
Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd.
 Error code list

The number described in [ ] is an error code for the M.operation unit.
Error
Error Contents Presumption Cause Countermeasure
code
10's : Gyroshere failure

Gyrosphere failure The phase current become large The gyro sphere replacement is nec-
Phase current of 350 mA by abnormality of gyro sphere. essary. (*1)
or more continued for 20
min. or more. (40 min. [Correspondence method under navigation]
for startup) • If the autopilot is used in auto naviga-
tion mode, switch to the hand navi-
010
gation mode according to the situa-
[10]
tion. After changing the navigation
mode, switch the gyrocompass to
the normal one. (*5)
• If the external heading device is con-
nected, switch to the external device.
(*2)
20's : Inverter failure

Inverter failure • Power unit (inverter section) fail- • Check the connectors of container
Phase current of 75 mA ure assy. (*1)
020 or less continued for 3 • Wiring failure • Check the cable connections of M.
[20] seconds. (no inverter Main BD ASSY, M.PWM INV BD
output voltage) ASSY, M.PS BD ASSY and TRANS
ASSY of mastercompass.
Low phase current • No phase current flow due to gy-
[Correspondence method under navigation]
Phase current of 75 mA rosphere failure.
• If the autopilot is used in auto naviga-
or less continued for 3 • Wiring failure
tion mode, switch to the hand navi-
seconds. (with inverter
gation mode according to the situa-
021 output voltage)
tion. After changing the navigation
[21] mode, switch the gyrocompass to
the normal one. (*5)
• If the external heading device is con-
nected, switch to the external device.
(*2)
30's : Memory Failure (The memory test is executed at start up)

ROM failure Memory element failure Replace the main-assembly unit. (*1)
030
ROM check sum failure
[30]
is generated.
RAM failure Memory element failure
031
RAM read/write failure is
[31]
generated.
*1: Ask your nearest service agent of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. to repair or maintain. Only technicians of the Service department
of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. are authorized to maintain. However, if for some reason the service department of Yokogawa
Denshikiki Co., Ltd. permits you to perform maintenance or exchanging the parts , obey instructions and execute it.
*2: Take enough care to navigation in consideration of the characteristic of the external heading device.
*3: Repair the system as soon as possible.
*4: It is limited that this alarm is generated , when the external signal is input to mastercompass.
*5: If the gyrocompass has automatic heading changeover function (OPTION), the gyrocompass is switched automatically.

Error
code
40's : Backup battery voltage failure

Backup battery voltage fail- Memory backup battery dissipa- Replace the main-assembly unit. (*1)
ure. tion
Voltage of memory back- [Correspondence method under navigation]
040
up battery falls to 2.5 V If the power supply is supplied continu-
[40]
or less. ously, all set values are kept.However
if the power supply is stopped, various
settings are initialized. (*3)
50's : Follow-up failure

Follow-up failure • The follow-up gain is set with • Execute command 23 or 24 to restart
Deviation of 0.5° or more large value. following-up
is generated for 12 sec- • Follow-up mechanism failure • Decrease the follow-up gain using
050 onds or more. • Motor drive circuit failure command 25.
[50] • Wiring failure • Replace the main-assembly unit.
• Replace the follow up mechanism.
• Replace the container.(*1)
• Check wiring and connections.
60's : Operation panel switch failure

Switch failure Switch failure of the operation • Replace the operation unit. (*1)
ON continuously for 60 unit.
seconds or more [Correspondence method under navigation]
060
There is no effect for heading detect,
[60]
displaying and signal output, but there
is a possibility that various operations
cannot be done.
70's : Communication failure between C.operation unit and master compass

Communication failure • Breakdown of C.operation unit • Check the cable connections of each
• Breakdown of PWB of master units.
compass broke • Exchange the PWBs or cable assy in
070
• The defectiveness of wiring be- master compass.
[70]
tween the C.operation unit and (M.TERMINAL BD ASSY, M.MAIN
the master. BD ASSY, C.MAIN BD ASSY, C.
TERMINAL BD ASSY) (*1)
Invalid data • The defectiveness of wiring be- • Check the cable connections of each
071 tween the C.operation unit and units.
[71] the master compass. • Check the connection of FG line.
• The Malfunction by signal noise.
No.2 master compass com- • Breakdown of C.operation unit • Check the cable connections of each
munication failure • Breakdown of PWB of master units.
compass broke • Exchange the PWBs or cable assy in
073 • The defectiveness of wiring be- master compass.
tween the C.operation unit and (M.TERMINAL BD ASSY, M.MAIN
the master. BD ASSY, C.MAIN BD ASSY, C.
TERMINAL BD ASSY) (*1)
No.2 master compass • The defectiveness of wiring be- • Check the cable connections of each
invalid data tween the C.operation unit and units.
074
the master compass. • Check the connection of FG line.
• The Malfunction by signal noise.

Error
code
80's : Automatic master compass alignment failure (Null point detection failure)
Master compass alignment • Breakdown of photo sensor • Exchange the photo sensor assy.(*1)
failure (Zero-point detection • Wiring failure of sensor connec- • Check the connection of sensor.
failure) tion
080
[Correspondence method under navigation]
[80]
If it is necessary to align the master
compass, operate the command 24
for manual alignment.
90's : External heading input failure

External heading input More than 10 seconds interrup- • Check the activation and setting of
Time out tion of external heading signal the connected device.
090
• Check the setting of the C.operation
[90]
unit.
• Check the wiring connection.
Protocol error of external The overrun error , framing error, • Check the wiring connection. (polar-
091 signal (*4) or parity error occurs in external ity of signal, etc.)
[91] signal. • Check the baud rate and hardware
protocols.
Check sum error of • The Malfunction by signal noise. • Check the cable connections of each
external heading signal • The disagreement of calculation units. (Especially the connection of
092
of check sum between gyro and FG line.)
[92]
connected device. • Check the setting of connected de-
vice.
093 Data invalid of external The system failure of connected Repair the connected device.
[93] heading signal device.
External ROT input time More than 10 seconds interrup- • Check the activation and setting of
out tion of external ROT signal the connected device.
094
• Check the setting of the C.operation
[94]
unit.
Check sum error of • The Malfunction by signal noise. • Check the cable connections of each
external ROT signal • The disagreement of calculation units. (Especially the connection of
096
of check sum between gyro and FG line.)
[96]
vice.
097 Data invalid of external The system failure of connected Repair the connected device.
[97] ROT signal device.

Error
code
100’s : Ship’s speed input failure (These error codes (100-103) occurs, only when having inputted speed automati-
cally.
These error codes (100-103) is prepared for the ship not applied DNV NAUTICAL
SAFTY (rule in July 2010).)
Speed signal time out More than 10 seconds interrup- • Check the activation and setting of
tion of speed signal the connected device.
100 • Check the setting of the C.operation
unit.
Check sum error of speed • The Malfunction by signal noise. • Check the cable connections of each
signal • The disagreement of calculation units. (Especially the connection of
102 of check sum between gyro and FG line.)
vice.
Data invalid of speed The system failure of connected Repair the connected device.
103
signal device.
110’s : Ship’s position input failure (These error codes (110-113) occures, omly when having inputted latitude auto-
matically.
These error codes (110-113) is prepared for the ship not applied DNV NAUTICAL
Latitude signal time out More than 10 seconds interrup- • Check the activation and setting of
tion of latitude signal the connected device.
110 • Check the setting of the C.operation
unit.
Check sum error of latitude • The Malfunction by signal noise. • Check the cable connections of each
signal • The disagreement of calculation units. (Especially the connection of
112 of check sum between gyro and FG line.)
vice.
Data invalid of latitude sig- The system failure of connected Repair the connected device.
113
nal device.
120's : Serial input port protocol error(These error codes (120-122) is prepared for the ship not applied DNV NAUTICAL
(These error codes (123-124) is prepared for the ship apllied DNV NAUTICAL
Protocol error of serial sig- The overrun error, framing error , • Check the wiring connection. (polar-
120
nal input port 1 or parity error occurs in serial ity of signal, etc.)
input signal. • Check the baud rate and hardware
Protocol error of serial sig-
121 protocols. (*1)
nal input port 2
Protocol error of serial sig-
122 nal input port 3
Ship’s speed inputfailure,Ship’s •Reffer ship’s speed input failure and
123 Transmit error input port1
position input failure. ship’s position input failure.
124 Transmit error input port2
NOTE
Regarding the error code of 100’s, 110’s, 123, 124, the alarm state is not cancelled even if recovered
the error factor.
The Alarm can be cancelled by changing of input method from [AUTO] to [MANUAL]. Furthermore,
to restart the automatic input, reset the input method to [AUTO] after checking the input signal.
About the input method setting of speed/latitude is described in section 4.2.2/4.2.3.

Error
code
130’s : Selector switch failure

Selector switch failure The selector switch of the change- Select the selector switch position to
130 over unit is positioned out of “NOR”.
“NOR”.
140’s : Alignment failure

Alignment failure Heading outputs of No. 1 and No. Check wiring and connection between
140 2 master compasses do not align. the operation unit and master com-
passes.
150's : Deviation alarm (See section 4.2.9 about the setting of threshold of deviation alarm.)
Deviation alarm The heading difference between • Check the propriety of threshold value.
150 (GYRO1-GYRO2) gyro 1 heading and gyro 2 heading • Check the master compass and ex-
exceeded the alarm value. ternal heading device. If gyro com-
pass outputs abnormal heading , ask
Deviation alarm The heading difference between your nearest service agent of
(GYRO1-External) gyro 1 heading and external azi- Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. If ex-
151
muth exceeded the alarm value. ternal heading outputs abnormal
heading, ask the manufacture serv-
Deviation alarm The heading difference between ice department.
(GYRO2-External) gyro 2 heading and external azi-
152 muth exceeded the alarm value. [Correspondence method under navigation]
If the autopilot is used in auto naviga-
tion mode, switch to the hand naviga-
tion mode according to the situation.

5.3 Repeater Compass Error Contents and

Countermeasures
5.3.1 The Display when Alarm has been Generated on the
Repeater Compass
The fail indicator LED blinks or lights when repeater compass detects failure.
The blink cycle of the fail indicator LED indicates the error content of repeater compass.
Fail Indicator LED (RED)
350 000 010 020

340 03
0 0
33 04
0 N 0
32
05
0
0
31
0
1
06
0
9
30
0 07
260 270 280 290
0 080
Fail Indicator LED (RED)
090 100 11
E
W
3
250
0 1
6 4
20
24
5
13
0
23
0
0 14
S 22 0
15
0 16 10
0 170 0 2
180 190 20
FAIL
RUN SYNC
DIMMER
Junction Box (MKN019) Steering Repeater Compass (MKR056)
 Repeater compass error contents and countermeasure
Fail indicator LED condition Error contents Causes Countermeasure

Light off ○ Normal
Light on ● CPU RAM failure or ROM Broken down CPU board Exchange CPU board
failure in Junction Box (*1)
Blink Light on one time per Null point detection failure Broken down optical sen- Exchange optical sensor
1.6 seconds. sor inside of Repeater (It is possible to adjust
compass null point by manually)
(*1)
●○○●○○●○○ The snapping of a wire for Restore connection

Optical sensor (It is possible to adjust
│1.6 s│ null point by manually)
↔
(*1)
Light on two times per Communication failure • Not connected signal Restore connection
1.6 seconds. between Master compass wire
and Repeater compass • The snapping of signal
●●○●●○●●○ wire
│1.6 s│ • Connected signal wire
↔ inversely
●: Light on ○: Light off

5.3.2 Procedure for Aligning Repeater Compass Indication

The Repeater compass indication is automatically aligned with the Master compass indication when
the power is turned on. In general, no other alignment is required. However, it is advisable to check
the Master compass display and the Repeater compass indication before departing from a port to
avoid possible accident. If the Master compass display and the Repeater compass indication match,
alignment of indication is not necessary.
NOTE
Check the readings of the Repeater compass card when the ship’s speed is set to “0.” If a speed-
error correction is performed, the Master compass card reading will not agree with the Repeater
compass card reading.
 Procedure using the zero adjustment switch

If the Repeater compass indication shifts from the Master compass display, use the zero adjustment
switch to align the indication.
Press this switch for 2 seconds or more. The Repeater compass card turns and the
zero of the compass card is aligned with the pointer to correct the shift.
Then, the Repeater compass follows up the received value.
If an error due to zero point photo-sensor failure is generated, use the procedure described below
to align the indication.
 Procedure in the case where the zero point photo-sensor fails

It is possible to adjust null point by manually when null point detection failure is occurred.
The procedure is as follows:
(1) Push Zero adjustment switch more than 2 seconds.
(The Repeater compass card will turn round and stop after 5 seconds.)
At this time Fail indicator LED shows null point detection failure.
(2) Push Zero adjustment switch. (The Repeater compass card will turn round rapidly)
(3) Push Zero adjustment switch when the outer Repeater compass card (360 degrees/
revolution) value go below 10 degrees. (Rough adjustment)
The compass card will turn round slowly.
(4) Push Zero adjustment switch when the compass needle agree with the 0 scale of inner
Repeater compass card.
After about 3 seconds the Fail indicator LED will be turned off and the Repeater compass
shows same heading as Master compass heading. (Fine adjustment)
If you failed manual null point adjustment, try again the above procedure.

< 6.Specifications > 6-1
6. Specifications
6.1 Performance and Specifications
6.1.1 Power Supply
Main power supply 100 /110/115/220 V AC 50/60 Hz
Backup power supply 24 V DC +30 %, -10 %
Power consumption At startup: Approx. 10 A + 0.35 A  number of repeater compasses
(24 V DC)
Steady sate: Approx. 7 A + 0.35 A  number of repeater compasses
Power consumption (AC) At startup: Approx. 250 VA + 12 VA  number of repeater compasses
Steady state: Approx. 200 VA + 12 VA  number of repeater compasses
6.1.2 Input Signal

Ship's speed signal for Number of circuits 1 circuit
speed-error correction
Signal form 200 pulses/n mile,
or serial IEC61162-1
Latitude signal for Number of circuits 1 circuit
speed-error correction
Signal form Serial IEC61162-1
Heading signal Number of circuits 3 circuits
Signal form Serial IEC61162-1
Alarm buzzer stop signal: 1 circuit, contact
Bow swap contact input 1 circuit, contact
C/O PRF singnal input 1 circuit, contact
6.1.3 Output Signal

Repeater compass signal Number of circuits 8 circuits
Signal form YOKOGAWA Original
Stepper heading signal Number of circuits 4 circuit, capacity 1 A
Signal form 24 V DC, 3-bit gray code, 1/6 degree/step
Serial heading/rate-of-turn Number of circuits 3 circuits, individual generation possible
signal
Signal form Serial IEC61162-1 / -2
Analog heading and Number of circuits 1 circuit each
quadrant signals
Signal form 0 to 5 V DC
Analog rate-of-turn signal Number of circuits 3 circuits, individual range setting possible
Signal form 0 to 5 V DC; 30, 100, 120, and 300 deg/min
Serial ship's speed input Number of circuits 1 circuit
distribution Output
Signal form serial IEC61162-1
No.1/No.2 Number of circuits 1 circuit each, contact
Volt-free signal:
Signal status "Open" or "closed" when no voltage is applied
No.1/No.2 Number of circuits 1 circuit each, contact
Gyro failure signal
Signal status "Open" or "closed" when gyro fails
(No.1/No.2/EXT) Number of circuits 1 circuit each, contact
Heading selection signal
Signal status Closed when each sensor is selected

6-2 < 6.Specifications >
No.1/No.2 Number of circuits 1 circuit each , Contact

Gyro running signal
Signal status "Open" or "closed" when running
System fail signal Number of circuits 1 circuit, contact
Signal status "Open" or "closed" when system fails
Deviation Alarm Number of circuits 1 circuit, contact
Signal status "Open" or "closed" when abnormal
Buzzer stop Number of circuits 1 circuit, contact
6.1.4 Setting Time and Accuracy
Settling time Within 5 hours (The gyro can actually be used after about 2 hours from start.)
North-pointing accuracy Within ± 0.25 °/cos φ (φ being the latitude at that location)
Follow-up accuracy 0.1 ° or less
Maximum follow-up speed 30 deg/s
6.1.5 Environmental Specifications (Normal Operating

Conditions)
Allowable roll and pitch 40 ° for both rolling and pitching

Allowable vibration 3 mm p-p or less for 8 to 8.3 Hz
0.35 mm p-p or less for 8.3 to 25 Hz
0.1 mm p-p or less for 25 to 50 Hz
Operating temperature - 15 °C to + 55 °C
range - 10 °C to + 50 °C (Master Compass)
- 25 °C to + 55 °C (Bearing Repeater Compass)

6.1.6 External Input /Output Signal Specifications and

Circuits
Signal Name Abbreviation Circuit / signal Specifications
Serial signal input RD1A
RD1B R
RD2A RDxA CRD
RD2B Current
Regulator
RD3A Diode.
RD3B RDxB
• Number of connectable circuits: 3

• Data contents: Heading, ship's speed and latitude
• Receiving circuit: Photo-coupler
• Transmission format: Start-stop serial signal
• Transmission rate: 4800 bps.
• Data format: See Appendix
Ship's speed LPP
pulse input LPN/BSC 5V
2.2KΩ
47KΩ
LPP
0.01μF
LPN

• Pulse rate: 200 pulses/n mile
• Signal format: Open collector (photo-coupler) or volt-free contact
Repeater compass 24VOUT
heading output GND 24V
SD1RA
SD1RB GND
RS422 Driver
24VOUT
GND SDxRA
SD2RA SDxRB
SD2RB
• • Number of connectable circuits : 8

• • Transmission system : RS422 (use a driver circuit equivalent to RS422A
• or RS485)
• Transmission format : Start-stop serial signal
• Transmission rate : 4800 / 9600 bps
• Character configuration : Start bit 1,
24VOUT Data bit 8,
GND Stop bit 1,
SD8RA Parity None
SD8RB • Data format and Transmission period:
Format Transmission period Remarks
PYDKH 1s only at 9600 bps
**HRC 1s only at 9600 bps
HEHDT 50 ms


Stepper heading REF
output 1SS1
< 4 wiring > Control circuit < 5 wiring > Control circuit
1SS2
1SS3 +24VDC REF +24VDC REF
1COM SS1 SS1
REF
2SS1 SS2 SS2
2SS2
2SS3
SS3
2COM SS3
REF Alarm
3SS1 Cir.
Master Master Com.
3SS2 compass Receiver compass Receiver
3SS3
3COM
Signal format
REF +24VDC
4SS1
4SS2 REF-SS1
4SS3 +24VDC
4COM
REF-SS2
+24VDC
REF-SS3
0 3/6 6/6°
1°
• Number of connectable circuits : 4

• COM : 0 V (circuit GND)
• REF output current : 1 A MAX
• Output form : Open collector output (24 V DC 3-bit gray code)
Serial signal output SD1A RS422 Driver
SD1B
SG SDxA
SDxB
SD2A
SD2B SG
SG
SD3A • Number of connectable circuits : 1 (IEC61162-1),

SD3B 2 (IEC61162-1/-2 selectable)
SG • Transmission system : RS422 (use a driver circuit equivalent to RS422A
or RS485)
• Transmission rate : To be selected from 4800 / 38400 bps.
• Data format : IEC61162-1 / -2
Unselected gyro SDEA RS422 Driver
heading signal SDEB
output SG SDEA
SDEB
SG
• Number of connectable circuits : 1(IEC61162-1/-2 selectable)

• Transmission system : RS422 (use a driver circuit equivalent to RS422A
or RS485)
• Transmission rate : To be selected from 4800 / 38400 bps.
• Data format : IEC61162-1 / -2


Analog heading HDG LF398 1KΩ 1KΩ
quadrant signal COM
HDG or QUD
output
QUD 0.1μF COM
COM
Signal format
Output Level
5.00
0V
0° 90° 180° 270° 360°
Heading signal
Output
5.00
3.75
2.50
1.25
0V
0° 90° 180° 270° 360°
Quadrant signal
• Number of connectable circuits: 1 each

• COM: 0 V (circuit GND)
• Output voltage: 0 to +5 V DC
• Output resolution: 2.5 mV
• Output impedance: 2 kΩ MAX
• Recommended input impedance of connected unit: 500 kΩ MIN
• Output accuracy: ±1% FS (at 25°C)
Analog rate-of-turn ROT1
LF398 1KΩ 1KΩ
output COM
ROT
ROT2 0.1μF COM
COM
ROT3
COM Signal Format
Output Level
5.000
4.844
2.500
0.156
0V
- 30°/min 0°/min 30°/min
-100 100
-120 120
-300 Rate of turn 300

• COM: 0 V (circuit GND)
• Output voltage: 0 to + 5 V DC
• Output resolution: 2.5 mV
• Output impedance: 2 kΩ MAX
• Recommended input impedance of connected unit: 500 kΩ MIN
• Output accuracy: ±1 % FS (at 25 °C)


Serial Ship’s RD1RA RS422 Driver
Speed Signal RD1RB
Distribution Output SG RD1RA
RD1RB
SG

• Transmission system: RS422
(use a driver circuit equivalent to RS422A or RS485)
• Transmission format: Start-stop serial signal
• Transmission rate: 4800 bps.
• Data format: IEC611162-1 See Appendix
C.operation Unit BSPIN Contact closed at buzzer
External Buzzer BSNIN stop.
Stop Contact Input
(MKC327 / MKN018) 2.2K
B r i d g e S e l e c t i o n BRGSEL Contact closed at AFT.
Contact Signal Input LPN / BSC Contact open at FWD.
CPU
(MKC327 / MKN018)
Prohibition Of Head- SELOF Contact closed at C/O PRF.
ing Changeover Con- SELOFC
tact Input
(MKC327 / MKN018)
Gyro Fail 1FAIL 1 JP
2
Contact Output 1FAILC 3 xFAIL
(MKC327) 2FAIL xFAILC

2FAILC
Contact
State
JP 1-2 JP 2-3
Power OFF Close Open
Normal Close Open
Fail Open Close
Power Fail 1PFO 1 JP

2
Contact Output 1PFOC 3 xPFO
(MKC327) 2PFO xPFOC

2PFOC
Contact
State
JP 1-2 JP 2-3
Normal Close Open
Fail Open Close
Running 1RUN 1 JP
2
Contact Output 1RUNC 3 xRUN
(MKC327) 2RUN xRUNC

2RUNC
Contact
State
JP 1-2 JP 2-3
Running Open Close
Not running Close Open


System Fail FAIL 1 JP
2
Contact Output FAILC 3 FAIL
(MKC327) FAILC
Contact
State
JP 1-2 JP 2-3
Normal Close Open
Fail Open Close
Deviation Alarm DEV 1 JP

2
Contact Output DEVC 3 DEV
(MKC327) DEVC
Contact
State
JP 1-2 JP 2-3
Normal Close Open
Fail Open Close
Buzzer Stop BSTOP 1 JP

2
Acknowledge BSTOPC 3 BSTOP
(MKC327) BSTOPC
Contact
State
JP 1-2 JP 2-3
Normal Close Open
Fail (at buzzer stop) Open Close
Output Heading G1 G1
Contact Output G2 G2
EXT EXT
(MKC327) COM
COM
Contact is made when the sensor is selected.

6.2 Serial Input/Output Data Sentence

Input/output Sentence Specifications Data
Input VMVSD YOKOGAWA original Ship’s speed(This data is unreceivable by ship which
apply DNV NAUTICAL SAFTY(rule in July 2010))
VBW IEC61162-1 Ship’s speed(This data is unreceivable by ship which
VHW IEC61162-1 Ship’s speed(This data is unreceivable by ship which
VTG IEC61162-1 Ship's speed
GGA IEC61162-1 Latitude
GLL IEC61162-1 Latitude (This data is unreceivable by ship which apply
DNV NAUTICAL SAFTY(rule in July 2010))
HDT IEC61162-1 Heading
HDG IEC61162-1 Heading
HDM IEC61162-1 Heading
HRC YOKOGAWA original Heading / Rate of turn
THS IEC61162-1 Heading / Status
Output HDT IEC61162-1 Heading
HDG IEC61162-1 Heading
HDM IEC61162-1 Heading
ROT IEC61162-1 Rate of turn
HRC YOKOGAWA original Heading / Rate of turn
PYDKH YOKOGAWA original Heading / Rate of turn
THS IEC61162-1 Heading / Status

6.3 Setting Dip Switches

Remove the upper cover of the master compass, and you will find the main assembly located in the
deepest part with the dip switches positioned on its left. These dip switches determine the transmis-
sion rate ,the communication data format, and DAC output settings.
DIP SW1 DIP SW2 DIP SW3 DIP SW4

ON ON ON ON
OFF OFF OFF OFF
Bit 1 Bit 8 Bit 1 Bit 8 Bit 1 Bit 8 Bit 1 Bit 8
Master compass M.MAIN BD ASSY DIP switch
Each dip switch determines the following settings:
CAUTION
Only technicians of the Service department of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. are authorized to
operat the setting of dip switches. However, if for some reason the service department of Yokogawa
Denshikiki Co., Ltd. permits you to perform these operations, be sure to follow the instructions
described in this chapter.
 Dip-switch settings and functions on Mastercompass

SW No. Bit Functions ON OFF Default
DIP SW1 1 reserved Set to "OFF" for operate OFF
2 OFF
3 OFF
4 OFF
5 OFF
6 OFF
7 OFF
8 OFF
DIP SW2 1 OFF
2 OFF
3 OFF
4 OFF
5 OFF
6 OFF
7 OFF
8 OFF
DIP SW3 1 OFF
2 Setting of analog ROT 1 output range See (Table 1) Setting of analog OFF
ROT 1 output range (page 6-10).
3 OFF
5 OFF
7 OFF


DIP SW3 8 Use C. operation unit Used Not Use ON
DIP SW4 1 Serial output mode during system failure Keep latest value NULL OFF
2 Setting of baud rate for repeater compass 4800 bps 9600 bps OFF
3 Reserved Set to “OFF” for operate OFF
4 OFF
5 OFF
6 System Reserved Set to "OFF" for operate OFF
7 OFF
8 OFF
(Table 1) Setting of analog ROT 1 / ROT 2 / ROT 3 output range

ROT 1 ROT 2 ROT 3
DIP SW 3 DIP SW 3 DIP SW 3 Output Range
Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ± 30 °/min
OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ± 100 °/min
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ± 300 °/min
ON ON ON ON ON ON ± 120 °/min
 Dip-switch settings and functions on MKR056 / MKN019

DIP SW1 1 System Reserved Set to "OFF" for operate OFF
2 OFF
3 OFF
4 OFF
5 Setting of input sentence for serial See (Table 2) Setting of input sen- OFF
port tence for serial port (page 6-10).
6 OFF
7 Setting of baud rate for serial port 9600 bps 4800 bps OFF
8 System Reserved Set to "OFF" for operate OFF
(Table 2) Setting of input sentence for serial port

DIP SW 1
Data Format
Bit 5 Bit 6
OFF OFF $HEHDT
ON OFF $HCHDT
OFF ON $GPHDT

6.4 List of Initial Values

After Command 36 is executed, Initial values are set as follows:
 C.Operation Unit
Items Value
External heading selection Port-1 NONE
Port-2 NONE
Port-3 NONE
Speed input AUTO / MANUAL MANUAL
Setting value 0 knot
Latitude input AUTO / MANUAL MANUAL
Setting value 0°
Threshold of deviation alarm G1 / G2 3.0°
G1 / EXT 00.0°
G2 / EXT 00.0°
External input format Speed Port No. P (Pulse port)
The ship which does not ap-
Already / New –
ply DNV NAUTICAL
SAFTY(rule in July 2010) Format –
Speed Port No. 1 and 2
The ship which apply DNV
Already / New Already
NAUTICAL SAFTY(rule in
July 2010) Format VTG
Latitude Port No. –
The ship which does not ap-
Ready-made / New –
ply DNV NAUTICAL
SAFTY(rule in July 2010) Data format –
Latitude Port No. 1 and 2
The ship which apply DNV
Ready-made / New Already
NAUTICAL SAFTY(rule in
July 2010) Data format GGA
External heading 1 Port No. –
Data format –
ROT input NONE
Data format –
ROT input NONE
Data format –
ROT input NONE

 Master compass
Items Value
Follow-up gain Gain 100 %
Master compass alignment REL / ABS –
Correction value 0°
Baud rate of output signal PORT-1 baud rate 4800 bps
PORT-2 baud rate 4800 bps
Output signal format PORT-1 GYRO REC 1 Output = HDG/ROT
Format= HEHRC
Period= 200 ms
REC 2 –
REC 3 –
EXT REC 1 –
REC 2 –
REC 3 –
PORT-2 GYRO REC 1 Output = HDG/ROT
Format = HEHRC
Period = 200 ms
REC 2 –
REC3 –
EXT REC 1 –
REC 2 –
REC 3 –
PORT-3 GYRO REC 1 Output = HDG
Format = HEHDT
Period = 1 s
REC 2 Output = ROT
Format = HEROT
Period = 1 s
REC 3 –
EXT REC 1 –
REC 2 –
REC 3 –
PORT-4 GYRO REC 1 –
REC 2 –
REC3 –
Stepper signal control Maximum angular velocity 24 °/s
Maximum angular acceleration 140 °/s2

6.5 External Product View

 Master Compass
MKM026-1 MAINTENANCE AREA Unit: mm
BOW SIDE
500
1002
502
A A
420 420 300

17
MAINTENANCE AREA
SECTION A-A CABLE ENTRY
4-ø13 HOLE
40
126
260±0.5
HOLE
331
200
260±0.5

 Control Box
MKC327-W
Unit : mm
297 200
2-ø14 HOLE
227±1
C. OPERATION UNIT
470±1
520
420
6
50 14
36
EXHAUST INHALATION
EARTH TERMINAL CABLE INLET (80 x 200)
MKC327-F
C. OPERATION UNIT 376 65
8-ø12 HOLE PANEL CUT
297
HOLE
272±1
472±1
500
420
472±1
272±1
430±2
307±2
208±1
12
200
208±1 8-ø12 HOLE 348±1
348±1
CABLE INLET (50 x 180)
EXHAUST INHALATION
EARTH TERMINAL

 AC Adapter
MKS066 301
2-ø14 HOLE INHALATION
225±1
INHALATION
EXHAUST
470±1
520
426
EARTH TERMINAL
CABLE INLET(50X100)
( HOLE)
6
50 14
106
200
MKS071
INHALATION
INHALATION
EXHAUST
CABLE INLET(50X100)
( HOLE)

 Repeater Compass / Junction Box / Stand & Bracket
Unit : mm
Repeater Compass
ø 246 ± 1 Connection Box 138
MKR050
MKN019 120 ± 1
102
000
N
170
0 1
9
7 8
270
2 3
090
W
132 ± 1
E
(235)
190
4 5 6
S
180
(1410)
Horizontal Stand
KX223A
ø 384
121
8
Horizontal Bracket
KX201A
378 ø 376
190
46
1170
200
391
130
110
180
ø 40
ø170
BASE LINE 20 3-ø18 HOLE
200
Tilting Bracket 160

KX213
27
ø 400
ø 150 ø 360 ± 1
245
35
386
6-ø19 HOLE
DRAIN
104 ± 0.5
138
12
30
BOW 3-ø17 HOLE 114 ± 0.5

 Steering Repeater Compass
MKR056-S/F2 MKR056-P Unit : mm
(115)
240
240 (8) 210㼼0.5 (115)
(20) 192 (2.5)
4-M5 x 0.8 (20)
4-M5 x 0.8
000 000
N N
0 0
9 1 9 1
210㼼0.5
8
8
2
2
240
192
240
270
270
90
W
90
E
E
7
7
3
3
6 4 6 4
5 5
48
48
S S
180 180
40
40
(20)
40 92 (20) 40 92
PANEL CUT
PANEL CUT
225㼼0.5
4-䃥6 HOLE 210㼼0.5 4-M6
(192)
(192)
HOLE
210㼼0.5
HOLE
225㼼0.5
(192)
(192)
MKR056-F1 MKR056-W
(115) (115)
View Z 192
(8) (8) 3.2
192 120㼼0.5
(20) (20)
4-M5 x 0.8 4-M5 x 0.8
000 000
N N
0 0
9 1 9 1
220㼼0.5
240
8
8
2
192
2
192
270
270
90
W
90
E
W
7
7
3
3
6 4 6 4
5 5
48
S S
180 180
4-䃥7 HOLE
40 68 (20) (20)
16
30
PANEL CUT
MOUNTING DIMENSION View Z
177㼼0.5 4-䃥6HOLE
4-M6
120㼼0.5
4-C13
182
177㼼0.5
HOLE 䃥20 HOLE

220㼼0.5
182
72

 C.operation unit
MKR040 2 40 40 Unit : mm
96
ø8
192 4-M5 x 0.8
4-ø6HOLE or M5
PANEL CUT 177±0.5
4-C13
86
HOLE
81±0.5
47
182 Attached cable (MAX 10m)
50
4-ø6 HOLE
129 6 36 40
144
ø8
4-M5 x 0.8
225 3.2
240
4 - ø6 HOLE or M5
PANEL CUT 225±0.5
47
4-C13 HOLE Attached cable (MAX 10m)
129±0.5
134
50
230
 Junction Unit
MKN018
MAX 10m 4-ø6 HOLE

2
TB54 TB55
2 1 8 1
120±0.5
140
TB52 TB53
1 13 1 13
TB50 TB51
1 13 1 13
170±0.5 (70) 42
(100) 190

< 7.Maintenance, Inspection and Installation > 7-1
7. Maintenance, Inspection and Installation
7.1 Inspection
Implement the following procedures of the daily inspection and regular inspection to maintain the
gyrocompass in a state of normal working order:
7.1.1 Daily Inspection

The inspection items are as follows.
Recommended
Inspection Item Inspection Contents and Procedure
Inspection Interval
Gyrosphere drive current Check that the current is within the range 0.15 A
Once/day
1 to 0.35 A by executing the command code “15”.
(at an arrival)
(See section 4.1.6)
Repeater compass align- Check that the heading of each Repeater com-
2 Once/departure
ment pass agrees with that of the Master compass.(*1)
Ship’s speed value Latitude Check that there are no errors in ship’s speed
3 and latitude by executing the command codes Once/day
“21” and “22”. (See section 4.2.2 and 4.2.3)
Azimuth error Check that there is no azimuth error using astro-
4 Once/day
nomical or physical target observation.
Deviation alarm setting Check that each deviation alarm threshold value
5 Once/departure
is a suitable value. (*2)(See section 4.2.9)
DC Battery input Check that the DC input voltage of AC Adapter
(MKS066/MKS071) are regulated voltage.
6 Once/year
MKS066 : TB1 3-4 and 23-24
MKS071 : TB1 3-4 and TB2 3-4
NOTE
*1: Check the readings of the Repeater compass card when the ship’s speed is set to “0”. If a
speed-error correction is performed, the Master compass card reading will not agree with the
Repeater compass card reading.
*2: Please set up a suitable heading deviation alarm threshold value according to the apparatus
connected. When a deviation alarm threshold value is 0.0 degree, a deviation alarm does not
occur.
7.1.2 Regular Maintenance
Perform the following maintenance once a year.
NOTE
Order to the Service Department of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. for regular inspection.
Inspection Item Procedure
1 Gyrosphere Cleaning of the lower and band electrode .
Container Cleaning of inside surface ,center pin (Exercise care when handling.) ,
2
lower electrode ,band electrode, follow-up electrode.
3 Supporting Liquid Replacement of supporting liquid
4 Air filter Cleaning of the air filter. (Replace the air filter when remarkably dirty.)

7-2 < 7.Maintenance, Inspection and Installation >
7.2 Maintenance of the Gyrosphere
CAUTION
Only technicians of the Service department of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. are authorized to
implement the operations and other work described in this chapter. However, if for some reason
the service department of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. permits you to perform these operations,
be sure to follow the instructions described in this chapter.
7.2.1 Precautions During Removal

 The gyrosphere should not be removed from the Master compass until at least
1.5 hours has elapsed since the power has been turned.
 Make sure that the surrounding area of the Master compass is clean, there is
ample lighting and prepare all required equipment and tools before beginning
work. To avoid damaging the nuts and bolts, be sure to use the correct tools
such as drivers and wrenches for each part.
 Be sure to do the following to ensure proper reinstallation of the gyrosphere:

• Provide mating marks to the required portions before disassembly.
• Temporarily reinsert the bolts into the correct holes.
• Place the disassembled parts in the correct order on a piece of clean paper or cloth.
• If wires are to be disconnected, keep a record of the color of each wire and attach labels to
them to ensure correct reconnection.
 Do not remove any part that does not need to be disassembled.
 Never disassemble the gyrosphere.
CAUTION
Precautions in handling the gyrosphere
• Hold the gyrosphere firmly with both hands so as not to subject it to any shock.
• Do not drop the gyrosphere. Dropping the gyrosphere may result in damage to the internal
mechanism or lead to personal injury.
• Do not disassemble the gyrosphere.
Precautions in handling the container
• Hold the container firmly with both hands.
• Do not drop it. Dropping the gyrosphere may result in damage to the internal mechanism or
lead to personal injury.

7.2.2 Removing the Gyrosphere

 Equipment and tools to be prepared
Beaker, No.2 Phillips screwdriver, minus screwdriver, syringe , a bottle for waste liquid, gyrosphere
stand and container stand.
Beaker
Syringe
Container stand Gyrosphere stand
 Removal of the container from the master compass and take-out of the gyrosphere
Remove the connectors connecting the master compass and the container.
Loosen the container bolts and remove the container from the master compass.
Remove the screw from the vent hole.
Remove the cap from the center pin.
Pull out the center pin.
Place the beaker under the drain and remove the drain screw.
Disengage the connectors that connect the upper and lower containers.
Loosen the nut and rotate the hook to outer side.
Remove the upper container.
Remove the supporting liquid from within the funnel-shaped portion.
Take the gyrosphere out of the lower container.
CAUTION
Use the container stand so that the container should not fall while working.
NOTE
Notes about disposal of the used supporting liquid.
• To dispose of used supporting liquid , please request processing to permitted industrial waste
disposal trader.
• Or contact your nearest service agent of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd.

 Procedure for removing the gyrospere

Remove the connectors connecting the master compass and the container.
Disengage the connectors (4 terminals).
Loosen the container bolts and remove the container from the master compass.
Loosen the three containe bolts.
Rotate counterclockwise while lifting the
container and remove.
Be careful not to let the container hit the floor.
Container bolts

Vent hole
Remove the cap from the center pin.

Turn the cap of the center pin to remove it.


Place the beaker under the drain and remove the drain screw.
Remove the drain screw.
Drain all the supporting liquid from the drain hole while
holding the container as horizontally as possible.
After draining, reinsert the screw in the drain hole.
Disengage the connectors that connect the upper and lower containers.
Disengage the connectors (two terminals).

Remove the hook that fasten the upper and lower containers together.
Loosen the long nut while pressing by
minus driver until the hook rotates to
outside.
Loosen all long nut in the same way.
Long nut
Remove the upper container.

Lift the upper container and remove.
Take care in the direction of all hooks.
Remove the supporting liquid from within the funnel-shaped portion.

Remove the supporting liquid, from the
funnel-shaped portion with a syringe
(remove all liquids).
CAUTION
Do not upset the gyroshere.

Take the gyrosphere out of the lower container.

When taking out the gyrosphere, hold the
side in a location with no gold line on it.
Place the removed gyroshpere on to a gyrosphere stand.

7.2.3 Installing the Gyrosphere

 Equipment and tools to be prepared
Prepare a gyrosphere, center pin, syringe, beaker, funnel, liquid, No.2 Phillips screwdriver,minus
screwdriver, Gyrosphere stand and Container stand .
Beaker
Center pin
Syringe
Container stand Gyrosphere stand
 Installing the gyrosphere and attaching the container to the master compass
Installation of the gyrosphere in the container should be carried out on a flat surface and care should
be taken not to knock the container over.
CAUTION
Replace the following parts at the maintenance.
• O ring of center pin
• O ring of drain screw
• O ring of container
• Seal washer of vent hole screw
Cleaning.
Confirm that oil doesn’t stick to the gyrosphere (side, lower and following electrode) and. top
of the center pin. If oil sticks, get rid of it with gauze contain benzine.
Confirm that the drain screw in the lower container is tight and then put the gyrosphere in the
lower container.
Attach the upper container to the lower containers.
Pour the supporting liquid into the container.
Insert the center pin and put the cap on.
Seal the vent hole.
Connect the connector.
Engage the container into position on the master compass and tighten the bolts.
Fasten the connectors that connect the master compass to the container.

CAUTION
Use the container stand so that the container should not fall while working.
 Procedure for installing the gyrosphere

Cleaning.
Confirm that oil doesn’t stick to the gyrosphere (side, lower and following electrode) and top of the
center pin. If oil sticks, get rid of it with gauze contain benzine.
CAUTION
Wipe the electrode of gyrosphere and container with gauze which soaked benzine for cleaning.
Take care as follows at cleaning.
• Do not flake off the painting of gyrosphere.
• Do not bend the electrode of container.
• Do not put benzine on glue of gyrosphere.
• Do not use the sponge with grinding.
Side band electrode Center Pin

of the gyrosphere
Gyrosphere
Lower electrode of
the container
Top
Lower container
Be careful, do not damage to the electrode

when you wipe off the stain with cloth .
please wipe from center of the electrode to
outside direction
Band electrode of container

Follow-up electrode of container
Upper container

Put the gyrosphere in the lower container.

Lower container
Drain screw
confirm that an O-ring is attached.
Drain
Confirm that there is an O-ring the lower

container.
Hold the gyrosphere as shown in the photo,

and with the container tilted, place it into the
container. Hold the sphere on the opposite side
of the gold line.
Do not tilt the gyrosphere beyond the required

limit (30º).
Gyrosphere
O-ring
After placing the gyrosphere in the container,

position the container and gyrosphere
horizontally.
Attach the upper container to the lower containers.

Confirm that there is an O-ring the lower
container, then align the knock-pin and fit both
the upper and lower containers to each other.
Hole
Pin

Rotate the hook to inside and tighten the long

nut by driver until the upper container closes
adherence to lower container.
Minus screwdriver
Rotate the hook to inside
Tighten six long nut. confirm that the upper

container closes adherence to lower container.
Pour the liquid into the container.

Prepare the supporting liquid in the beaker.
Insert the funnel into the hole of the center pin

after put off the vent hole screw.
pour liquid slowly from the beaker into the

funnel until it begins to overflow from the vent
hole. (Liquid is used by 650 ml in total)
Vent hole

Insert the center pin and put the cap on.

Confirm that there is an O-ring on the center pin
and then insert the center pin.
O-ring
Put the cap on.
Seal the vent hole.

Seal the vent hole with screw.
Wipe off any liquid that overflows from the vent

hole with the rag.

Fasten the connectors (two terminals) that
connect the upper and lower containers.

Engage the container into position on the master compass and tighten the bolts.
Insert the container bolts into the hanging slit of master
compass and rotate clockwide the container.
Hanging slit
Container bolts
Align the mating marks when engaging the

container.
Then tighten the container bolts.
Mating marks
Container bolts
Fasten the connectors that connect the master compass to the container.

7.2.4 Replacing the Fuse

The Control box (MKC327) and AC adapter (MKS066/MKS071) use the fuses to protect the
system. If the fuse is fused, replace it.
Refer the appendix-4 to confirm the fuse position.
CAUTION
Turn off the power supply when replacing the fuse.
The capacity of fuse depends on system configuration. Select the fuse of appropriate capacity.
7.2.5 Confirmation of System Operation

CMZ900 system have the command to confirm the system operation.
 Lamp test
It is possible to check the display and buzzer sound by operating the keys of the operation unit.
See section 3.2.2
 Repeater signal output

It is possible to output the repeater signals, serial signals and analog signals.
See section 4.3.4
 Analog signal output

It is possible to output the arbitrary analog voltage.
See section 4.3.2

7.2.6 Preparation of Supporting Liquid

Approximately 650 mL of supporting liquid are used in the Master compass unit, and further 1 L of
supporting liquid are provided for spare. Contact Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. for further supplies.
Supporting liquid should always be supplied by Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd., but in unavoidable
circumstances, you may prepare supporting liquid as follows:
Put the each material in distilled water at the specified rate. Stir the mixture until the benzoic acid
dissolves. If the benzoic acid does not melt easily, heat the mixture at less than 90 degrees. At then
use the protection tool so as not to inhale.
Distilled water 1.8 L

Glycerin 145 mL
Benzoic acid 3.2 g
NOTE
If the specific gravity of the prepared liquid deviates from the value shown below, add glycerin or
distilled water to make fine adjustment.
Temperature Specific Gravity

15 °C 1.0230 ± 0.001
20 °C 1.0220 ± 0.001
25 °C 1.0208 ± 0.001
30 °C 1.0193 ± 0.001

7.3 Precautions During Installation

Exercise care with the following items when installing a gyrocompass.
7.3.1 Vibration Measures

The floors on which the Master compass and the horizontal stands are installed, and the walls on
which the remote unit, horizontal brackets, tilted brackets, course recorder, digital Repeater com-
pass, etc. are installed, should be reinforced against vibrations from the hull.
7.3.2 Parallelism of Lubber’s Lines

Install the Master compass, Repeater compasses for the horizontal stand and Repeater com-
passes for the horizontal bracket so that their lubber’s lines are parallel with ship’s fore-and-aft line.
Since the accuracy of the parallelism of these lines is the basis of heading measurement, adjust
them to within an accuracy of ± 0.5 °.
7.3.3 Service Area

Ensure that the dimensions of the running, operating and maintenance area of the Master compass
are as specified below.
50 mm
or more
50 mm
or more
500 mm
or more
Front
300 mm
or more

< Appendix > A-1
Appendix-1 Description of Speed Error and

Speed Error Table
1.1 Speed Error

The speed error is an error generated when a ship in which a gyrocompass is installed sails a course
other than east or west. Its value is determined depending on the ship’s speed, course, and latitude.
(It is not related to the kind or type of gyrocompass.)
The north-seeking tendency of a gyrocompass is based on the earth’s rotation. When a ship sails,
the resultant motion of the ship’s motion and the earth’s rotation acts on the north-seeking ten-
dency of the gyro. If the course of the ship deviates towards the north or south, the direction of the
resultant motion deviates north or south and thus an error occurs because the north-seeking force
of the gyro acts perpendicular to this resultant motion. That is, the speed error is the angle of the
difference between this resultant motion and the east-west direction.
1.2 Determining Speed Error

N’ N
ψ: Latitude
V B K: Speed of the earth’s rotation at
δ θ the equator (About 900 knot)
V: Ship’s speed (knot)
C θ θ: Gyrocompass course
δ δ: Speed error
0 Κcosψ A
In the figure above, AC = V cos  = K cos  • sin 

Since  is a small value,
sin =  (radian) = 1 / 57.3  (unit: degree)
From these equations,  = 57.3 V cos / 900 cos 
If we assume, for example, that the ship is at the equator ( = 0), the gyrocompass course is N (
= 0), and the ship’s speed is 30 knot, then
 = 57.3 × 30 / 900 = 1.91 degrees = 1 ° 54 ’
When the value of  is between 270 ° to 90 °, the compass indication increases. Therefore, the
ship’s true course is as shown below.
0 ° - 1 ° 54 ’ = 358 ° 6 ’
As seen above, if the compass course deviates towards the north, the true course can be obtained
by subtracting the speed error from the compass course, and if the course deviates towards the
south, the true course is obtained by adding the speed error to the compass course.
Next we will describe how to determine the speed error depending on ship’s speed, course and
latitude, using the following two procedures. The true course can be determined by referring to the
following table and chart.

A-2 < Appendix >
(1) Determining the speed error using the speed error calibration table (Table-1)
Refer to the speed error calibration table (Table-1) to determine the correction value and then cor-
rect the course either by subtracting the correction value if the course has deviated towards the
north or by adding the correction value if the course has deviated towards the south. For example,
assume that the ship is sailing near the latitude of 40 ° and the course is read at 30 ° and the speed
at 16 knots. The correction value under these conditions is shown as 1.1 in the table. Since the
ship is sailing north, the true course of the ship is 30 ° - 1.1 ° = 28.9 °. Similarly, assume that the
ship is sailing near the latitude of 40 ° and the course is read at 150° and the speed at 16 knots. In
this case, the ship is sailing south, and so the true course is 150 ° + 1.1 ° = 151.1 °.
(2) Determining the speed error using the speed error calibration chart (Chart-1)
 Locate the ship’s speed V on the horizontal axis.
 Draw a vertical straight line from the position of the ship’s speed and determine the intersection
with the line of gyrocompass course angle θ where the angle θ is the deviation towards the
north if the ship is sailing north and towards the south if the ship is sailing south.
 Next, draw a straight line that crosses that intersection and is parallel to the horizontal axis,
and determine the intersection with the line of current latitude  of the ship.
 The speed error can now be read from this second intersection. The speed error thus obtained must
be read as a negative value if the ship is sailing north and positive if the ship is sailing south.
Example:
Assume that the ship is sailing at a speed of 12 knots at the point of north latitude of 40 ° and the
gyrocompass course reads 320 °.
The course of 320 ° indicates that the course deviates by 40 ° from the north towards the west.
Draw a vertical straight line from point (a), at 12 knots on the horizontal axis, and determine the
intersection with the line of θ = 40 °, (b). Draw a horizontal straight line that crosses point (b) and
determine another intersection with the line of  = 40 °, (c). The speed error can now be read from
this second intersection (c), which is 0.77. This gives the true course of the ship as 319.23 °.

< Appendix > A-3
Table-1 Speed Error Calibration Table
Determine the true heading by correcting the compass course using this table.
Lati- Course(degrees) Speed (knot)

tude Northward Southward 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40
0 360 180 180 0.3 0.5 0.8 1.0 1.3 1.5 1.7 2.1 2.3 2.6
15 345 165 195 0.3 0.5 0.8 1.0 1.3 1.4 1.7 2.0 2.2 2.5
0° 30 330 150 210 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.9 1.1 1.3 1.5 1.8 2.0 2.3
~ 45 315 135 225 0.2 0.4 0.5 0.7 0.9 1.1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8
60 300 120 240 0.1 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.3
20° 75 285 105 255 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.6
90 270 90 270 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0 360 180 180 0.3 0.6 0.9 1.2 1.5 1.7 2.0 2.3 2.6 3.0
15 345 165 195 0.3 0.6 0.9 1.1 1.4 1.6 2.0 2.3 2.5 2.3
30 330 150 210 0.2 0.5 0.7 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.8 2.0 2.3 2.5
30° 45 315 135 225 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.2
60 300 120 240 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.3 1.5
75 285 105 255 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.7
90 270 90 270 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0 360 180 180 0.3 0.7 1.0 1.3 1.7 2.0 2.3 2.6 3.0 3.3
15 345 165 195 0.3 0.7 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.9 2.2 2.5 2.8 3.2
30 330 150 210 0.3 0.6 0.8 1.1 1.4 1.7 2.0 2.3 2.6 2.8
40° 45 315 135 225 0.2 0.5 0.7 0.9 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.2 2.3
60 300 120 240 0.2 0.3 0.6 0.7 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.3 1.5 1.8
75 285 105 255 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.7 0.8
90 270 90 270 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0 360 180 180 0.4 0.7 1.1 1.4 1.8 2.2 2.5 2.8 3.2 3.6
15 345 165 195 0.3 0.7 1.0 1.4 1.7 2.1 2.4 2.8 3.2 3.5
30 330 150 210 0.3 0.6 0.9 1.2 1.6 1.9 2.1 2.5 2.8 3.2
45° 45 315 135 225 0.3 0.5 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.7 2.0 2.3 2.5
60 300 120 240 0.2 0.4 0.5 0.7 0.9 1.1 1.2 1.5 1.6 1.8
75 285 105 255 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9
90 270 90 270 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0 360 180 180 0.4 0.8 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 2.8 3.2 3.6 4.0
15 345 165 195 0.4 0.8 1.1 1.5 1.8 2.2 2.6 3.0 3.5 3.8
30 330 150 210 0.3 0.7 1.0 1.3 1.6 2.0 2.3 2.6 3.0 3.4
50° 45 315 135 225 0.3 0.6 0.8 1.1 1.4 1.7 2.0 2.3 2.5 2.8
60 300 120 240 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
75 285 105 255 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
90 270 90 270 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0 360 180 180 0.4 0.9 1.3 1.8 2.2 2.7 3.2 3.5 4.0 4.4
15 345 165 195 0.4 0.9 1.3 1.7 2.1 2.6 3.0 3.4 3.8 4.3
30 330 150 210 0.4 0.8 1.1 1.5 1.9 2.3 2.7 3.2 3.5 3.8
55° 45 315 135 225 0.3 0.6 0.9 1.3 1.6 1.9 2.3 2.5 2.8 3.1
60 300 120 240 0.2 0.4 0.7 0.9 1.1 1.3 1.5 1.7 2.0 2.2
75 285 105 255 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.2
90 270 90 270 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0 360 180 180 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.1 3.6 4.2 4.6 5.0
15 345 165 195 0.5 0.9 1.4 1.9 2.4 2.9 3.5 4.0 4.5 4.8
30 330 150 210 0.4 0.8 1.3 1.7 2.1 2.6 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.3
60° 45 315 135 225 0.4 0.7 1.1 1.4 1.8 2.2 2.5 2.8 3.2 3.5
60 300 120 240 0.3 0.5 0.8 1.0 1.3 1.5 1.8 2.0 2.3 2.5
75 285 105 255 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.6 0.7 0.8 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3
90 270 90 270 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0 360 180 180 0.6 1.2 1.8 2.4 3.0 3.6 4.2 4.8 5.5 6.1
15 345 165 195 0.6 1.2 1.7 2.3 2.9 3.5 4.1 4.6 5.2 5.8
30 330 150 210 0.5 1.0 1.6 2.1 2.6 3.1 3.6 4.2 4.6 5.2
65° 45 315 135 225 0.4 0.9 1.3 1.7 2.1 2.6 3.0 3.4 3.8 4.3
60 300 120 240 0.3 0.6 0.9 1.2 1.5 1.8 2.2 2.4 2.7 3.0
75 285 105 255 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.9 1.1 1.3 1.4 1.5
90 270 90 270 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0 360 180 180 0.7 1.5 2.2 3.0 3.7 4.5 5.2 6.0 6.8 7.5
15 345 165 195 0.7 1.5 2.2 2.9 3.6 4.3 5.0 5.8 6.5 7.2
30 330 150 210 0.6 1.3 1.9 2.6 3.2 3.9 4.5 5.2 5.8 6.5
70° 45 315 135 225 0.5 1.1 1.6 2.2 2.7 3.2 3.7 4.2 4.6 5.2
60 300 120 240 0.4 0.7 1.1 1.5 1.9 2.2 2.6 3.0 3.3 3.6
75 285 105 255 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.3 1.5 1.6 1.9
90 270 90 270 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

A-4 < Appendix >
Chart-1 Speed Error Calibration Chart
FA0401

< Appendix > A-5
Appendix-2 Principle of Gyrocompass
2.1 Gyro
The gyro is supported in a freely rotating manner around its longitudinal axis and transverse axis
by supports and the center of gravity of the gyro and its supports is positioned at the intersection of
both spinning axes, and the gyro is turned at a high speed (Figure 1). The direction of the gyro axes
does not change even if the stand of the gyro is tilted or rotated. This is because the magnitude
and direction of inertia of rotation (angular momentum) are maintained provided that neither friction
nor external forces affect the rotating action. This is a characteristic of a gyro.
A
B’
Figure 1 Figure 2
Hanging a weight from tip (A) of the spinning axis of the gyro (Figure 2), slightly lowers side (A) and
this affects the spin of the gyro. The weight causes the gyro to spin around the BB’ axis, which
creates a torque around the transverse axis. This causes the gyro to spin in the direction of the
arrow, which generates a torque around the BB’ axis that supports the gravitational force of the
weight. This phenomenon is called precession and is another typical characteristic of a gyro. Pro-
vided there is no friction at each axis, the gyro angular momentum (moment of inertia × rotating
speed), applied torque, and resulting precession speed have the following relations:
(1) Quantitative: Angular momentum × precession speed = torque

(2) Direction: Vectors are shown in Figure 3.

A-6 < Appendix >
2.2 North-seeking Tendency of Gyrocompass

Suppose that a weight is hanging under the supports as shown in Figure 3 such that the center of
gravity for the entire gyro system, supports and weight is positioned directly under the intersection
of two axes. If friction on both longitudinal and transverse supports is negligible at this time, the end
of the longitudinal axis A oscillates up and down and right and left in an elliptical orbit due to the
gravitational force and spinning action of the earth.
The spin of the ellipse orientates around north. By attaching an adequate damping device, the
amplitude of oscillation gradually decreases and the longitudinal axis stabilizes in the northern
orientation. This is the gyrocompass. This north-seeking tendency is further detailed below.
Figure 4 shows the earth’s spin. The components of the angular velocity of the spin, , at point p
on latitude  can be expressed as:
sin  (spinning motion around the vertical axis)
cos  (tilting motion along the horizontal meridian)
Angular velocity of spin of earth

ω cos φ ω
Precession speed
ω
A
Torque
ω sin φ φ
B
Weight φ
Angular momentum
Equator
Figure 3 Figure 4
If the gyro shown in Figure 3 is placed on point p with Up

A facing east and B facing west and with the A-B axis North
horizontal (Figure 5), the orientation of the gyro re- ω sin φ
West
mains the same. However, since the inclination at this B ω cos φ
point on the earth remains the same as time elapses,
the end-point A of the A-B axis rises and the end-point A
B goes down relative to the horizontal plane. Then, East
precession is carried out as the weight generates a South
Down
torque to return the A-B axis to the horizontal position.
Figure 5
When end-point A arrives at the meridian with the gyro
tilted, the tilt is at its maximum and end-point A contin-
ues to turn towards the west. When end-point A enters Up
on the west side of the meridian, the inclination starts
acting so as to lower A. The torque caused by the
weight gradually decreases and precession stops North
when end-point A reaches the west end. Then, like- West East
Horizon
wise, end-point A goes down and begins pointing to-
wards north. In such a manner, the orientation of the
gyro spins around with north at its center in an elliptical Down
motion as shown in Figure 6.
Figure 6

< Appendix > A-7
In a gyrocompass, this elliptical motion of the gyro is reduced and the orientation of the gyro stops
at north. When the gyro axis is aligned with the meridian, end-point A stabilizes along the horizon-
tal plane; however, when end-point A deviates either to the east or to the west, it lowers or rises
away from the horizontal plane and starts moving towards north due to precession.
When the gyro axis is stable in a northern orientation, the precession force offsets the component,
cos  (spinning motion), of the earth’s spin.
The above describes the north-seeking principle. However, in reality, a gyro experiences rolling
and pitching and other undesired influences. A single gyro cannot offset all these influences, and
hence two gyros are linked together by a special mechanism to actively prevent rolling and pitching
errors. This is performed by causing precession in each gyro as soon as the gyros are affected by
an external force and thus canceling the external force just as with the aforementioned occurrence
of a force offsetting the gravitational force of a weight. In this case, the resultant angular momentum
of two gyros and the north-seeking tendency remain unchanged. Since the north-seeking force of
a gyro is very small, the design of the gyro must be such that the frictions in the longitudinal and
transverse axes are comparatively negligible, so as not to affect the north-seeking tendency.
2.3 Gyrocompass Errors

2.3.1 Speed Error
Refer to Appendix-1, “Description of Speed Error and Speed Error Table.”
2.3.2 Acceleration Error

If there is a change in ship’s speed or course, a torque occurs on the gyrosphere because the
center of gravity of the gyrosphere falls below the center of buoyancy. This causes an error in the
north-seeking reading of the gyrosphere. This error varies with the position of the center of gravity
while the speed error also varies with the changes in the ship’s course and speed. These errors in
the reading can offset each other by adjustment of the position of the center of gravity. The optimum
design of the center of gravity of the gyrosphere in the CMZ900 prevents the acceleration error from
occurring. (As a result, the oscillation cycle of a gyrosphere when the damper is removed is about
85 minutes.)
2.3.3 Rolling and Pitching Error

If the gyrosphere is continuously subjected to vibration from the ship’s rolling and pitching and if the
vibration cycles along the east-west axis and north-south axis of the gyrosphere greatly differ, this
difference of vibration cycle between two axes causes an error. To compensate for this, two gyros
are provided to reduce the differences between the vibration cycles along the north-south axis and
east-west axis, thus preventing the rolling and pitching error. In addition, a damper mounted to the
suspending mechanism damps vibration so as to gain stable reading.

A-8
IM80B10M-17E
(G1 ) (G2 ) (ACC .)
FUSE Rating
SW1 SW2 SW3 DC None
TB 1 3 1 F1 Back Up Back Up
NO.1 24 VDC INPUT 1 124V (× 2=1) ( × 2=0)
1GND 6 4 F2 CONTROL BOX MKC 327 CN 1 PS 1
2 DUAL PS BD
224V 3 1 F3 F1,F2 15 A 15 A
NO.2 24 VDC INPUT 3
4 2GND 6 4 F4 F3,F4 15 A 15 A Vin Vout
100/110/115 F5 ASSY
AC INPUT /220 VAC 50/60Hz 21 U 3 1
6 4 F5,F6 2A 2A
22 V F7,F8 2A CNT P. FAIL
9 7 F7 V 8123 VR
24V DC BATT.INPUT 23 B24V DET. 1
12 10 F8 DC / DC 25 V
24 BGND JP 1
9 7 for NONE BACK UP SYSTEM (×2=0)
12 10
5 1MP 24 F1
POWER SUPPLY (NO.1 MKM 026) CN 2 PS 2
6 1MN 1,2
25 1MP
4,5 Vin Vout
26 1MN
POWER SUPPLY (NO.2 MKM 026) 7 2MP
8 2MN CNT P. FAIL
2MP 1,2
27 4,5 DET. 2
28 2MN JP 2 DC / DC 25 V
for DC BACK UP SYSTEM (×2=1)

POWER SUPPLY (COM 24V DCOUT) 9 POUT CN 6 REF2 24 VDC
10 NOUT F1 F2 F3 POWER SUPPLY
< Appendix >
POWER SUPPLY (COM 24V DCOUT) 29 POUT 24 F 1 24 F2

30 NOUT for
24 F 2
REPEATER
POWER SUPPLY (100 VAC OUT) 11 UOUT
12 VOUT CN 7 CN 3 CN 5
12 10 Select SW
POWER SUPPLY (100 VAC OUT) 31 UOUT D1
32 VOUT
G1
POWER SUPPLY (100 VAC OUT) 13 UOUT
VOUT CN 1
14 NOR TB 20
POWER SUPPLY (100 VAC OUT) 33 UOUT F6
VOUT G2 1 24VOUT
34
2 GND Serial output 1
DC / DC 3 SD1RA
5V (Repeater compass)
4 SD1RB
CN3 VCC VCC CN 1 5 24VOUT
9 7 VCC1 VCC2
TB50 TB55 VCC2 VCC1 6 GND Serial output 2
VCC 1 5VDC 7 SD2RA (Repeater compass)
1 1RDRA 1 MG1 VCC1 VCC2 VCC3 DC / DC
1 NO.1 8 SD2RB
2 1RDRB 2 CABLE ASSY NORM 5V
3 2 NO.2 MG2 9 24VOUT
1SDRA 3
3 NOC RL 1 VCC 1 +/- 12 V1 10 GND Serial output 3
No.1 Serial signal I/O 4 1SDRB 4 V8123XB VCC1 PF 1 P.FAIL +/ - 12 V1 DC / DC
5 4 NORM VCC2 VCC1 VCC2 R .TERMINAL 11 SD3RA (Repeater compass)
SG 5 +/ - 12 V
5 GND CN2 DET. 1 24 F1 12 SD3RB
No.1 Power fail contact input 6 1PFI
6 RD1BA VCC VCC 2 13 24VOUT
7 1PFIC RL 6,7 VCC VCC 2 DC / DC BD ASSY
7 RD1BB 14 GND Serial output 4
No.1 Running contact output 8 1RUN SEL 1A PF 2 P.FAIL +/- 12 V2 5V
8 SG 15 SD4RA (Repeater compass)
9 1RUNC DET. 2 24 F2 V 8123 VN
+/ - 12 V2 16 SD4RB
No.1 Fail contact output 10 1FAIL RL 8,9 DC / DC
11 1FAILC
TB54 TB 21
1 SEL 2SA VCC +/- 12 V
No.1 Power fail contact output 12 1PFO 1 B24 1 24VOUT
3 VCC1
13 1PFOC 2 B24G SELECT 2 GND Serial output 5
STA POWER FAIL 3 SD5RA
LATCH SEL 1A CN 6 (Repeater compass)
TB56 NORM STATUS STA 4 SD5RB
TB51 VCC2
GENERATOR 1 REF 5 24VOUT
1 2RDRA 1 SDPOA
C .OPERATION UNIT SEL 2A 2 REF 6 GND Serial output 6
2 2RDRB 2 SDPOB
24 F 1 7 SD6RA (Repeater compass)
3 2SDRA 3 SDPIA
24 F 2 8 SD6RB
No.2 Serial signal I/O 4 2SDRB 4 SDPIB MKR 040 5VDC
3 1 3 1 9 24VOUT
5 SG 5 SG
No.2 Power fail contact input 6 2PFI 6 2 2 CN 4 CN 2
11 SD7RA (Repeater compass)
7 2PFIC 7 SW 2 SW 3
12 SD7RB
No.2 Running contact output 8 2RUN 8 MEMBRANE SW Analog signal
VCC 1 VCC 2 13 24VOUT
9 2RUNC
No.2 Fail contact output 10 2FAIL V8123RA/RB SEL1A SEL2 SA Repeater
Serial signal Photo Relay 15 SD8RA (Repeater compass)
11 2FAILC
Serial Stepper signal 16 SD8RB
No.2 Power fail contact output 12 2PFO CN1
13 2PFOC CN 5
signal
TB52
Appendix-3 Block Diagram
Unselected gyro heading 1 SDEA CN1 SEL1 A SEL 2SA CN 2 S .TERMINAL

VCC1 VCC2
signal output 2 SDEB ± 12 V1
3 SG C.DISP BD ASSY RL 2,3 RL 4,5 BD ASSY
3.1 MKC327 Block Diagram

Serial signal input 1(LOG) 4 RD1A
V8123VB VCC1 VCC2 VCC1 VCC2 CN 3
5 RD1B V 8123 VW
GAIN
1REF 2REF
ZERO,
Serial signal input 2 6 RD2A SEL1A SEL 2SA
7 RD2B CN1 SEL2 A JP 1
± 12 V1 ±12 V2 TB 30
Serial signal input 3 8 RD3A
RL10 RL 11 1 1REF
V8123VZ/VX
9 RD3B SEL1 A
2 1SS1
Gyro select lock status input 10 SELOF
CN1 3 1SS2
11 SELOFC
BUFFER
BUFFER
4 1SS3 Stepper signal output 1
Buzzer stop contact signal output 12 BSTOP
C.MAIN BD ASSY 5 COM
C.TERMINAL BD ASSY
13 BSTOPC
CN 1 6 2REF
V8123VE 7 2SS1
TB 53 8 2SS2
Buzzer stop Contact input 1 BSPIN CN2 CHANGE - OVER BD ASSY 9 2SS3 Stepper signal output 2
2 BSNIN 10 COM
System Fail Cont.output 3 FAIL V8123VT TB 31
4 FAILC
1 3REF
5 G1
2 3SS1
6 G2
3 3SS2
Status Contact output 7 EXT
4 3SS3 Stepper signal output 3
8 COM CN 1 5 COM
Deviation contact output 9 DEV
6 4REF
10 DEVC
7 4SS1
Pulse input (Ship’s speed) 11 LPP
TB63
8 4SS2
TB60
TB61
TB62
TB64
12 LPN /BSC
Bridge select status input CABLE ASSY V8116VA 9 4SS3 Stepper signal output 4
13 BRGSEL
SG
SG
SG
1SG
1SG
1SG
1SG
2SG
2SG
2SG
2SG
HDG
10 COM
1REF
1SS1
1SS2
1SS3
2REF
2SS1
2SS2
2SS3
COM
QUD
COM
COM
COM
COM
1HDG
2HDG
SD1A
SD1B
SD2A
SD2B
SD3A
SD3B
ROT1
ROT2
ROT3
1COM
1QUD
1COM
1COM
1COM
1COM
1COM
2COM
2QUD
2COM
2COM
2COM
2COM
2COM
1RD1A
1RD1B
1RD2A
1RD3A
1RD3B
1ROT1
1ROT2
1ROT3
2RD1A
2RD1B
2RD2A
2RD2B
2RD3A
2RD3B
2ROT1
2ROT2
2ROT3
1RD2B
1RD 1RB
2RD 1RA
2RD 1RB
1RD 1RA
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Serial input
Serial input
Serial input
Analog input
HDG / QUD
Analog input
ROT
Analog input
ROT
Analog input
ROT
Serial input
(Repeater
compass)
Stepper
signal input
Serial input
Serial input
Serial input
Analog input
HDG / QUD
Analog input
ROT
Analog input
ROT
Analog input
ROT
Serial input
(Repeater
compass)
Stepper
signal input
Serial output
Serial output
Serial output
Analog output
HDG / QUD
Analog output
ROT
Analog output
ROT
Analog output
ROT
No.1 Master Compass No.2 Master Compass

AC ADAPTER MKS 066 (G1 ) (G 2) (ACC .)
BACK UP ASSY SW1 SW2 SW3 CONTROL BOX MKC 327 C.TERMINAL BD ASSY
TB 1 F1
TB 1
3 1 9 24V 11 TB 1 24 V V8123VD MKR 040
DC INPUT 24VDC P NF P
F2 3 1 F1
4 N N 2 10 24V 1 124V 24 F 1C TP1
F3 6 4 F2 VCC (5V DC)
AC INPUT 1 U U 3 11 GND 12 2 1GND 1 24 F 1E TB 54 F1 +5V TP2 CN 1 CN 2
NF F4 AC / DC 3 F3 TP1 TP2 TP 3
100 to 230 VAC 2 V V 4 12 GND 3 224V 1 47,48 47 ,48
6 4 F4 P. Fail DC / DC
50 / 60 Hz 5 7 BU24V 41 4 2GND 2 49,50 49 ,50
3 1 F5 Detecter 1 TP 4
6 8 BUGND 42 21 U VCC
7 3 6 4 TPG2
NOV1 7 22 V CN1 PS1 CN 5 TPG1 28,29 28 ,29
8 RL 4 NOVC1 8 23 B24V 1,2 30 30
1,2 + Vin +V 1,2 0V GND
9 5 NOV2 9 24 BGND 45,46 45 ,46
FL 1
10 6 NOVC2 10 4,5 - Vin -V 3,4
F5 3,4
11 1 UOUT 5 TP5
F6
12 2 VOUT 6 5 1MP
6 1MN CNT DS 1
1,2 2
25 1MP U1 DC / DC R.TERMINAL BD ASSY
4,5 1 3
26 1MN
TB 1 TB 1 7 2MP JP1 0V 24 V V8123VN
F7
DC INPUT 24VDC 23 P P 1 9 24V 31 8 2MN F1 CN 6 TPG1 TP1 TB 20
NF F8 1,2 1 F2
24 N N 2 10 24V 27 2MP 1 ,2
F9 4,5 2 1 24 VOUT
AC INPUT 21 U U AC / DC 3 11 GND 32 28 2MN 3 ,4 REPEATER COMPASS 1
NF 9 2 GND
100 to 230 VAC 22 V V 4 12 GND POUT
50 / 60 Hz F10 5 7 BU24V 10 NOUT F2 CN 7 VCC F3
1 PS 1 5 24 VOUT
6 8 BUGND 29 POUT 1 CN1 VCC(5V) REPEATER COMPASS 2
2 F1 6 GND
7 3 NOV1 27 30 NOUT 2 1, 2
F3 3 1,2 TP2 F4
8 RL 4 NOVC1 28 3
11 UOUT 4 DC / DC 9 24 VOUT
9 5 NOV2 29 4 3, 4 REPEATER COMPASS 3
12 VOUT 3,4 TPG2 10 GND
10 6 NOVC2 30 12 10 CN 3
F11 31 UOUT D1 1 F5
11 1 UOUT 25 1
F12 32 VOUT 2 13 24 VOUT
12 2 VOUT 26 2 GND REPEATER COMPASS 4
13 UOUT 3 14 GND
14 VOUT 3
F6 24 F 2C
33 UOUT F6 TB 21
34 VOUT TP6 TP7 24 F 2E 1 24 VOUT
P. Fail
TP8 2 GND REPEATER COMPASS 5
TB1 TB1 TP9 F7
F3 Detecter 2
3 1P P P 3 1 9 24V 5 124V 5 24 VOUT
NF F4 2 10 CN2 PS2 6 GND REPEATER COMPASS 6
4 1N N N 4 24V 9 7
F1 3 11 GND 1,2 + Vin +V
1 1U U U U U 1 6 1GND FUSE Rating F8
NF NF F2 AC / DC
2 1V V V V V 2 4 12 GND FL 2 9 24 VOUT
5 7 BU24V DC None 4,5 - Vin -V 10 GND REPEATER COMPASS 7
F9 6 8 Buck Up Buck Up TP10
11 1U BUGND F9
F10 7 3 (× 2 =2 ) ( × 2= 1) 13 24 VOUT
12 1V NOV1 7 1NV1
2 CNT DS2 REPEATER COMPASS 8
8 RL 4 NOVC1 8 1NVC1 14 GND
F 1,F 2 15 A 15 A U2 1 3
9 5 NOV2 9 1NV2 DC / DC
10 6 NOVC2 10 1NVC2 F 3,F 4 15 A 15 A
JP2
11 1 UOUT F 5,F 6 2A 2A
12 2 VOUT F 7,F 8 2A
CN3
4
TB2 TB2 4
F7 5
P P 3 1 9 24V 5 224V 24 F 1C 5
3 2P 6
NF F8 2 10 24 F 1E 6
4 2N N N 4 24V 7
F5 3 11 GND 24 F 2C 7
1 2U U U U U 1 6 2GND 8
NF NF F6 AC / DC 24 F 2E 8
2 2V V V V V 2 4 12 GND DUAL PS BD ASSY V8123VR
5 7 BU24V
6 8 BUGND
7 3 NOV1 7 2NV1
8 RL 4 NOVC1 8 2NVC1
DUAL AC ADAPTER 9 5 NOV2 9 2NV2
10 6 NOVC2 10 2NVC2
11 1 UOUT
12 2 VOUT
4
2
1
MKS 071
4
2
3
1
VCC3
CN1
TB 60
CN1
SERIAL DISTRIBUTOR 1 1RD1A
TP1 2 1RD1B
TB 2 MHB 306 SW1 TB1 3 1SG
F1 24V2 24V1 GND
1 P1 1 P 4 1RD2A +5V1
DIGITAL REPEATER 1 2 N1 2 N 5 1RD2B TPG2 TP2 TPG1 TP1 VCC1
F2 TP 3 +5V
3 P2 6 1SG PS1
DIGITAL REPEATER 2 4 N2 7 1RD3A TP9
F3 TPG1 0V2 0V1 DC /DC SW2
5 P3 8 1RD3B TPG3 3 1
DIGITAL REPEATER 3 9 1SG 5V RL1 VCC3
6 N3 +12 V1 +12 V1
F4 TP2 VCC 10 1HDG
7 P4 PS2 2
DIGITAL REPEATER 4 11 1COM TP4 P. Fail 5
8 N4 5
F5 12 1QUD DC / DC 6
9 P5 DC / DC TP5 Detecter 1 6
DIGITAL REPEATER 5 10 N5 13 1COM +/ - 12 V 7
F6
7
11 P6 14 1ROT1 8
8
DIGITAL REPEATER 6 12 N6 TPG2 15 1COM - 12 V1
GND -12 V1 CN6
16 1ROT2 RL1
17 1COM
18 1ROT3 +5V2
VCC2 VCC3
19 1COM PS3 TP6
ROT INDICATOR 1 MKR 302 DC / DC
TB 61 VCC3
1 1RD1RA 5V +12 V2
ROT INDICATOR 2 MKR 302 2 1RD1RB +12 V2
3 1SG PS4 TP7 P. Fail
4 1REF DC / DC Detecter 2
ROT INDICATOR 3 MKR 302 5 1SS1 TP8
+/ - 12 V 2
6 1SS2
7 1SS3 - 12 V2
24V2 24V1 - 12 V2 3 1
3.2 MKC327 Circuit Diagram (Power line)

8 1COM
NO.1 MASTER SW3
DS2 DS1
TB 62
COMPASS 1 2RD1A VCC1
2 2RD1B VCC1 +12 V1 - 12 V1 VCC2 +12 V2 - 12 V2 VCC3 VCC
MKM 026 NFB
P NF P 3 2SG DS9
N N 4 2RD2A
5 2RD2B
6 2SG DS10 RL 1 S . TERMINAL BD ASSY
7 2RD3A 35 V
8 2RD3B CN2 TP2 V 8123 VW
24 V VCC2 1,2
9 2SG
CN6 3,4
TB1
10 2HDG 1
F2 REF 11 2COM DS3 DS4 DS5 DS6 DS7 DS8 DS13 1 F1 TB 30
2
2 1 1REF
IM80B10M-17E
12 2QUD 3 CN3 EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT 1
13 2COM 3 24 V 5 COM
4 4 1 F5
2ROT1
< Appendix >
14 2 JP 1
TP1 1 6 2REF
15 2COM 3 EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT 2
16 2ROT2 1REF 2 10 COM
DS33 CN5 CN1 3
17 2COM
18 2ROT3 1 1 0V F9 TB 31
NO.2 MASTER 19 2COM 2 2 1 3REF EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT 3
6 6 TPG 1 5 COM
TB 63 7 7 F 13
6 4REF
COMPASS NFB
1 2RD1RA EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT 4
MKM 026 P NF P 2 2RD1RB 10 COM
N N 3 2SG
4 2REF 2REF TB 64
DS34
5 2SS1 CHANGE - OVER BD ASSY
6 2SS2
7 2SS3
24 V V8123VT
SG
SG
SG
8 2COM
HDG
QUD
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
SD1A
SD1B
SD2A
SD2B
SD3A
SD3B
ROT1
ROT2
ROT3
TB1
F2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
SERIAL & ANALOG SIGNAL OUTPUT

A-9
A-10 < Appendix >
Serial output 1
(Repeater compass)
Serial output 2
(Repeater compass)
Serial output 3
(Repeater compass)
Serial output 4
(Repeater compass)
Serial output 5
(Repeater compass)
Serial output 6
(Repeater compass)
Serial output 7
(Repeater compass)
Serial output 8
(Repeater compass)
3.3 MKC327 Circuit Diagram (R.TERMINAL BD ASSY I/F)
 R.TERMINAL BD ASSY (V8123VN) Test points and LED arrangement charts

TGP1
TP1
TP2
DS1 TP3 TP2

< Appendix > A-11
Stepper
signal
output 1
Stepper
signal
output 2
Stepper
signal
output 3
Stepper
signal
output 4
3.4 MKC327 Circuit Diagram (S.TERMINAL BD ASSY I/F)
 S.TERMINAL BD ASSY (V8123VW) Test points and Jumper pin arrangement charts
JP1
TP3
TP2
TGP1
TP6
TP5
TP1
TP4

CHANGE - OVER BD ASSY
A-12
V8123VT VCC 3
Gyro Select Logic Status Control Logic
G1 NORMAL G2
IM80B10M-17E
C/ O SW TP 12
VCC
TP32 VCC 1
NORM NORM Power
+ 12 V1 PF 1
Fail
VCC 1 VCC 2 - 12 V1
VCC 1 Detect 1 PF1 DS 11 VCC VCC 1 VCC 2
PC 13 VCC 1 VCC 2 24 F 1 C
1 4
RL 6 , 7 RL 8 , 9 24 F 1 E
CN3 VCC
SW4 TP 14
MG1 2 3 VCC 3
1 VCC 1 VCC 3
DS 24
G1 VCC 2 DS 26 DS 27 DS 28 TP38 TP 13
NOR 2 PC 14
MG1 1 4 MG1 VCC 2 + 5 V3
SEL1A Power
G2 MG2 + 12 V2 PF 2
MG2 2 3 Fail
3 - 12 V2

Detect 2 PF2 DS 12 VCC
SEL 1 VCC 2 24 F 2 C
< Appendix >
4 SEL 1 DS 13
MG2 SEL 2 SEL 1 24 F 2 E
TP39 + 5 V3
SEL 2 S VCC VCC
SEL2SA
C.TERMINAL
VCC
BD ASSY
SEL 2 S SSR 2
V8123VZ SEL 1 SEL 2 G1 Priority TP24 4
VCC 1 RL 6 , 7 RL 8 , 9 20 Hz SSR 2 1 ST 1
SEL1A 10 Hz 5 Hz
TB 55 CN2 OSC DS 25
TP26
1 PC 11 4 Select Input 2
1 NO1 1 Latch TP37 3
SEL 1 VCC 2
G1 SEL TP25 PF 1 Power SAT 2 ST 2
2 3 VCC DUAL PS
SEL 1 Fail
SEL2A PF 2
TP27 NORM Generator BD ASSY
P24 G
SEL 2
V8123VR
PC 12
1 4
2 NO2 2 SEL 2 CN 6 CN 3
G2 SEL 1REF
RST 1 1
2 3 2REF
2 2
NORM Status SW2 SW3
P24 G 1 1 3 3
P24 V1 RST
DS 21 DS 22 DS 23 Power Supply
SW4 NORM 2 2 4 4
3 NOC 3 Power On G1 G2 3 3
24 F 1 C 5 5
4 NORM 4 ST 1 Reset G1 G2 NOR valid valid H
C.OPE 6 6
G1 valid valid L 24 F 1 E
5 GND 5 ST 2 P24 V2
G2 valid valid L 24 F 2 C 7 7
G1 none valid H 24 F 2 E 8 8
TB 61 G2 valid none H
4 1 REF VCC 1 Gyro Select Logic Status Control Logic

No.1 RL 2 , 3
5 1 SS 1 RL 2 , 3 SW4 SEL1 SEL2 SEL1A SEL2A SEL1A SEL2SA Note PF 1 PF 2 NORM STA 2
Master Compass
Stepper signal 6 1 SS 2 NOR L L L L H H H H L L
input 7 1 SS 3 NOR H L H L L H H H H H
DS 33 DS 31 VCC 2 NOR L H L H H L G1 and G2 H L L 10 Hz
8 COM 1 REF 1 SS VCC 1 Power Supply
SEL 1 A NOR H H H H L H H L H 10 Hz
RL 4 , 5 valid S.TERMINAL
G1 * * H L L H L H L 5 Hz
G2 * * L H H L L H H 5 Hz BD ASSY
G1 H L H L L H G1 Power L L L L V8123VW
3.5 (1) MKC327 Circuit Diagram (CHANGE-OVER BD ASSY I/F)

DS 34 DS 32 SEL 2 A G1 L H L H L L Supply none L L H L
2 REF 2 SS VCC 2
G2 L H L H H L G2 Power
G2 H L H L L L Supply none CN5 CN1
TB 63 RL 4 , 5 1 1
* : Don’t Care REF
4 2 REF 2 2
No.2 SS 1
5 2 SS 1 3 3
Master Compass SS 2
Stepper signal 6 2 SS 2 4 4
input SS 3
7 2 SS 3 5 5
8 COM 6 6
7 7
< Appendix > A-13

A-14 < Appendix >

< Appendix > A-15
 CHANGE-OVER BD ASSY LED, VR and Switch arrangement charts
DS6 DS13 DS8 DS7 DS9,10 SW3 DS11, 12 DS25

SW2 DS27,28
DS2 DS22,23
DS3 DS24
DS4 DS26
DS21
DS1
DS41,42,43 VR6,7,8,9,10
DS45,46,47 DS31
DS5 DS32
VR5
VR3 VR4
VR1 VR2

A-16 < Appendix >
 CHANGE-OVER BD ASSY Test points arrangement charts
TP4 TP14 TP12 TP13 TP62 TP63 TP9
TP2 TP32
TPG2 TP27
TP1 TP26
TPG1 TP64
TP65
TP3 TP24
TPG3 TP59
TP60
TP25
TP6 TP58
TP39 TP56
TP5
TP8
TPG4
TP38 TP7
TP61 TP55 TP51 TP57 TP53 TP52 TP54

C.OPERATION UNIT
MKR040
MEMBRANE SW
V8123RA/RB
CN1
CN1
C.DISP BD ASSY
V8123VB
CN1
CN1
CN3 RED
C.MAIN BD ASSY 1
2 BLACK
V8123VE JUNCTION UNIT
BUZZER MKN018
CN2
C.TERMINAL BD ASSY
CABLE ASSY V8116VA/V8221WT/WU/WV/V8116VB V8123VZ/VX (*1)
3.6 MKR040&MKN018 Block Diagram

* Normally this board is included in MKC326 or MKC327.
(*1) V8123VZ: The ship which does not apply DNV NAUTICAL SAFTY(rule in July 2010)
V8123VX: The ship apply DNV NAUTICAL SAFTY(rule in July 2010)
IM80B10M-17E
< Appendix >

A-17
A-18 < Appendix >
C.DISP BD
V8123VB
ASSY
C . O P E R AT I O N U N I T
MKR040
C.MAIN BD
V8123VE
ASSY
C.TERMINAL BD
V8123VZ
ASSY
3.7 MKR040&MKN018 Circuit Diagram (Power line)

< Appendix > A-19
3.8 (1) MKR040&MKN018 Circuit Diagram (Signal I/F)

A-20 < Appendix >

< Appendix > A-21

A-22 < Appendix >

< Appendix > A-23

A-24 < Appendix >
 C.DISP BD ASSY (V8123VB) Test points arrangement charts
TP8 TP6
TP10
TP7
TP5
 C.MAIN BD ASSY (V8123VE) Test points arrangement charts

TP6 TP3 TP2 TP1
TP33
TP36
TP4
TP31, 32
TP5
TP23, 30 TP20, 25, 27 TP19
 C.MAIN BD ASSY (V8123VE) LED arrangement charts
LED11 LED1 LED8

LED4 LED9
LED3 LED10
LED2 LED5
LED7 LED6

< Appendix > A-25
 C.TERMINAL BD ASSY (V8123VZ/V8123VX) Test points and Jumper pin arrangement
charts
TP1 TPG2 JP2 JP4 JP6
TPG1
TP2
JP7 JP1 JP3 JP5 JP11

A-26
IM80B10M-17E
No.1 MASTER COMPASS MKM026
SW UNIT
DC INPUT
24VDC
MKR026
CN14
CN12
CN20
CN11
P NF P
N N
CN16
M. PWM INV
M. PS BD ASSY

BD ASSY
CN11
CN13
< Appendix >
(V8123WH)
1 RDMA
(V8123WE)
Serial data input (B-type) 2 RDMB TB1
CASE 3 SG V8114UK
4 P
CN2
CN15
5 N
6 RDRA
7 RDRB
8 SDRA
MKR040 I/F 9 SDRB CN19 CN14 CN9 CN10
10 SG
CASE 11 SD1A
Serial data output 1 12 SD1B (A)
13 SG PHOT SENSOR
CASE 14 SD2A
TRANS ASSY
ASSY
2
Serial data output 2 15 SD2B (V8123TC)
CN20
16 SG CN1 V8114UQ
CASE 17 SD3A
Serial data output 3 18 SD3B
19 SG
CASE
BLK
RED
20 REF
21 SS1
22 SS2 FAN
Stepper signal output 23 SS3 M. MAIN
CASE 24 COM V8114UP STEPPING
25 SG
CN7
26 PS35V MOTOR ASSY BD ASSY

27 PSGND M.TERMINAL FAN MOTOR ASSY
28 G/M (V8123GZ) V8114UR
29 G/MC BD ASSY (V8123WB)
30 GF (V8123WL)
31 GFC
32 NV 27
33 NVC 28
34 24V 30
35 GND 31
3.9 MKM026 Block Diagram

Serial output 1 36 SD1RA
(Repeater compass) 37 SD1RB CONTAINER ASSY SLIP RING
38 SG 1
CASE 39 24V (V8123CW/DP) 2
40 GND 3
CN1
Serial output 2 41 SD2RA 4

42 SD2RB
CN1
CN3
(Repeater compass)
43 SG
CASE 44 24V
45 GND
Serial output 3 46 SD3RA V8114UJ
(Repeater compass) 47 SD3RB
48 SG V8114UB
CASE
CN8
1 BSNIN
2 BSPIN TB2
TB3
CN10
HDG
COM
Analog HDG/QDT output QUD
CASE COM
Analog ROT output 1 ROT1 OPERATION I/F BOARD
CASE COM MMI/F ASSY V8114UA/UC
Analog ROT output 2 ROT2 UNIT ASSY ASSY
CN5
CN1
CN2
CN1
COM V8114SL
CASE ROT3 V8114SG
Analog ROT output 3 MKR025
CASE COM
M.PS BD ASSY M.MAIN BD ASSY
SWITCH UNIT V8123WH V8123WB
MKR026 CN16 PS2
1 NOISE 3 1,2 CURRENT +Vin +V +5V +5V
FILTER FILTER
2 4 3,4 LIMITTER -Vin -V
SG
CNT
M.TERMINAL BD ASSY CN14 CN3
7 7
V8123WK/WL CN2 CN15 6 6
TB1 F2 1 1 5 5 +24V
20 REF 2 2
1,2 1,2
24 COM JP2
3,4 3,4
26 PS35V
27 PSGND
24VGND
CN2 PS1
CN15
F6 3 3 +Vin +V
FILTER
34 24V 4 4
-Vin -V
35 GND +5V
SG CN5 CN1 M.OPERATION
F7 14,31 14,31
CNT FILTER UNIT
39 24V
CN19 15,32 15,32 MKR025
40 GND
3
F8 4
44 24V
45 GND
CN20
1,3
4,6
7-18
19-30
F1
4 P
5 N
CN11
1,3
4,6
7-18
+5V +12V -12V
19-30
JP4
RL3 TP1 PS1 TP26 CN12 CN14 TP78
M.PWM BD ASSY +15V
1 3 +Vin +V 25-27 25-27
V8123WE TP2 CTL COM
32 NV -Vin GND 3,4,7,8,19-24 3,4,7,8,19-24
33 NVC TP3 TP27 -15V TP79
-V 28-30 28-30
I24V TP4 +5V
TRM 11-18 11-18
I24VGND JP1
PS2 TP28 +5V
+Vin +V
FAN MOTOR CN1 CTL
1 1 -Vin TRM
ASSY 2 2 TP29
-V
V8123GZ COM
+15V +5V
PS3 VDD TP9 VCC
TP7
+15V +5V
TRANS ASSY +Vin +V +Vin OUT +5V
CTL GND +5V
V8123TC -Vin TRM
100V 15.3V
CN9 TP8
1 -V
SO PO DC/DC +5V VSS CN12 CN14
VCC +15V VR1 TP5 TP80
3 INVERTE PFAIL
9-10 9-10
3.10 MKM026 Circuit Diagram (Power line)

5
COM
7 CN13 CN11
ACON ACON
TP75
9,10 9,10 +5V
PC PC
25,26 25,26
TP77
COM CN20
TP46 1
ACU 2
IM80B10M-17E
3
CN1 SLIP LING CN10 TP22 TP24
< Appendix >
27 2 2 5
1 1 6 +24V CN5
TP23
1,2
31 30 ACV2 TP25 4
STEPPING
(S,red) (N,yellow) 5
MOTOR
COM 6
DRIBER
7
CN2
28 1 1

A-27
A-28
IM80B10M-17E
-12V -12V +12V +12V VCC VCC M.MAINBDASSY
+24V
V8123WB CN7
TP79 TP78 TP48 (White)
1
DGND (Yellow)
TP50 ∼ 53 2
V8123WH
3.3V 3
M.PS ASSY
VCC 3.3V 1 OUT A(Black)
TP49 4

U24 8 OUT A(Green)
5
< Appendix >
+24V U4 MOTOR
CN14 CN3 DRIVER 11 OUT A(Red)
VCC VCC 6
1,2 1,2 18 OUT A(Blue)
7
STEPPING
3,4 3,4 VCC MOTOR
U40
14 6 10 11 34 VCC CN20
5 5 U43 +
U40 1
6 6 12 8 12 13 37 65 4 3 OUT
2
U59 - PHOTO
7 7 3 SENSOR
8 8 U1
VCC MPU
U44
8 9 39
1 BUS LINE
18 2 3 U49 U40
2 8 9 122
VCC
VCC
4 8 3
7 U18 1 4
U44 2 U14 U13
U44
13 12 11 10 108
14
U66
TP80
TP77
TP75
TP76
PC
PFAIL
DEV
ACON-I
VCC +12V -12V
3.11 (1) MKM026 Circuit Diagram (Signal I/F)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
CN11
CN14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
CN12
CN13
M.PWM INV BD ASSY

V8123WE
< Appendix > A-29

A-30 < Appendix >
6$

< Appendix > A-31

A-32
IM80B10M-17E
TP50 (DGND) TP63 (ADVCC) TP30 TP79 TP78 LED10 LED7 TP80

< Appendix >
TP52 (DGND)
LED3,LED4,LED5,
TP19,LED6 TP77
TP35 TP76
TP37
TP38 TP75
TP36
TP53 (DGND)
TP51 (DGND) LED9, LED8, LED2 TP39 TP32 TP48 (VCC) TP49 (3.3V)
 M.MAIN BD ASSY (V8123VB) Test points and LED arrangement charts
< Appendix > A-33
3.12 MKS066 Block Diagr

A-34
IM80B10M-17E
㪽㫆㫉㩷㪥㪦㪥㪜㩷㪙㪘㪚㪢㩷㪬㪧㩷㩿㬍㪊㪔㪇㪀
㪽㫆㫉㩷㪛㪚㩷㪙㪘㪚㪢㩷㪬㪧㩷㩿㬍㪊㪔㪈㪀
㪝㪣㪊㩿㪈㪍㪘㪀㪚㪥㪈㪪㪮㪈㪙㪘㪚㪢㩷㪬㪧㩷㪘㪪㪪㪰

㪈㪥㪝㪊㪊㪐㪎㪝㪊
㪉㪋㪋㪈㪉㪈㪇㪝㪋㪫㪙㪈㪈
㪭㪏㪈㪈㪋㪫㪛㪫㪙㪈㪇
㪈㪐㪉㪋㪭

㪫㪙㪈㪜㪉㪈㪇㪉㪋㪭
< Appendix >
㪈㪈㪬㪈㪊㪈㪊㪈㪊㪈㪝㪈㪣㪂㪊㪈㪈㪞㪥㪛
㪘㪚㩷㪠㪥㪧㪬㪫
㪈㪇㪇㪆㪈㪈㪇㪆㪈㪈㪌㪆㪉㪉㪇㪭㪘㪚㩷㪌㪇㪆㪍㪇㪟㫑㪉㪉㪥㪝㪋㪉㪥㪝㪋㪉㪍㪋㪝㪉㪉㪋㪈㪉
㪈㪭㪥㪂㪞㪥㪛
㪉㪋㪭㪛㪚㩷㪠㪥㪧㪬㪫㪊㪈㪧㪝㪣㪈㩿㪌㪘㪀㪝㪣㪉㩿㪍㪘㪀㪄㪌㪎㪙㪬㪉㪋㪭
㪋㪋
㪈㪥㪄㪍㪏㪙㪬㪞㪥㪛
㪥㪦㪅㪈㩷㪉㪋㪭㪛㪚㩷㪦㪬㪫㪧㪬㪫㪌㪈㪉㪋㪭㪚㪥㪈㪎㪊㪥㪦㪭㪈
㪍㪈㪞㪥㪛㪉㪂㪪㪈㪈㪏㪩㪣㪋㪥㪦㪭㪚㪈
㪎㪈㪥㪭㪈㪋㪄㪪㪐㪌㪥㪦㪭㪉
㪐㪃㪈㪇
㪟㪮㪪㪊㪇㪇㪄㪉㪋
㪏㪈㪥㪭㪚㪈㪐㪚㪥㪫㪈㪇㪍㪥㪦㪭㪚㪉
㪐㪈㪥㪭㪉㪈㪇㪫㪦㪞㪈㪈㪈㪬㪦㪬㪫
㪈㪇㪈㪥㪭㪚㪉㪝㪐㪈㪈㪧㪝㪈㪉㪉㪭㪦㪬㪫
㪈㪈㪬㪦㪬㪫㪝㪈㪇
㪈㪉㪭㪦㪬㪫㪧㪦㪮㪜㪩㩷㪪㪬㪧㪧㪣㪰
䎩䎸䎶䎨䎃䎵䏄䏗䏌䏑䏊
䎧䎦䎱䎲䎱䎨
䎥䏄䏆䏎䎃䎸䏓䎥䏄䏆䏎䎃䎸䏓
䎩䎔䎏䎩䎕䎔䎓䎤䎔䎓䎤
䎩䎖䎏䎩䎗䎔䎘䎤䎕䎤
䎩䎜䎏䎩䎔䎓䎕䎤䎕䎤㪽㫆㫉㩷㪥㪦㪥㪜㩷㪙㪘㪚㪢㩷㪬㪧㩷㩿㬍㪊㪔㪇㪀
㪽㫆㫉㩷㪥㪦㪥㪜㩷㪙㪘㪚㪢㩷㪬㪧㩷㩿㬍㪉㪔㪇㪀
㪽㫆㫉㩷㪛㪚㩷㪙㪘㪚㪢㩷㪬㪧㩷㩿㬍㪊㪔㪈㪀
㪝㪣㪍㩿㪈㪍㪘㪀㪚㪥㪉㪪㪮㪉㪙㪘㪚㪢㩷㪬㪧㩷㪘㪪㪪㪰

㪈㪊㪊㪐㪎㪝㪎
㪉㪥㪝㪋㪋㪈㪉㪈㪇㪝㪏㪫㪙㪈㪈
㪭㪏㪈㪈㪋㪫㪛㪫㪙㪈㪇
3.13 MKS071 Block Diagram

㪈㪐㪉㪋㪭
㪫㪙㪉㪝㪌㪜㪉㪈㪇㪉㪋㪭
㪈㪉㪬㪈㪊㪈㪣㪂㪊㪈㪈㪞㪥㪛
㪘㪚㩷㪠㪥㪧㪬㪫㩷
㪈㪇㪇㪆㪈㪈㪇㪆㪈㪈㪌㪆㪉㪉㪇㪭㪘㪚㩷㪌㪇㪆㪍㪇㪟㫑
㪈㪥㪝㪊㪈㪥㪝㪊
㪍㪋㪝㪍㪉
㪉㪉㪭㪉㪋㪉㪋㪉㪥㪂㪋㪈㪉㪞㪥㪛
㪉㪋㪭㪛㪚㩷㪠㪥㪧㪬㪫㪊㪉㪧㪝㪣㪋㩿㪌㪘㪀㪝㪣㪌㩿㪍㪘㪀㪄㪌㪎㪙㪬㪉㪋㪭
㪋㪉㪥㪄㪋㪍㪏㪙㪬㪞㪥㪛
㪥㪦㪅㪉㩷㪉㪋㪭㪛㪚㩷㪦㪬㪫㪧㪬㪫㪌㪉㪉㪋㪭㪚㪥㪈㪎㪊㪥㪦㪭㪈
㪍㪉㪞㪥㪛㪉㪂㪪㪏㪩㪣㪋㪥㪦㪭㪚㪈
㪎㪉㪥㪭㪈㪋㪄㪪㪈㪈㪐㪌㪥㪦㪭㪉
㪐㪃㪈㪇
㪟㪮㪪㪊㪇㪇㪄㪉㪋
㪏㪉㪥㪭㪚㪈㪐㪚㪥㪫㪈㪇㪍㪥㪦㪭㪚㪉

㪐㪉㪥㪭㪉㪈㪇㪫㪦㪞㪈㪈㪈㪬㪦㪬㪫
㪈㪇㪉㪥㪭㪚㪉㪈㪈㪧㪝㪈㪉㪉㪭㪦㪬㪫
㪈㪈㪙㪬㪉㪋㪭
㪈㪉㪙㪬㪞㪥㪛㪧㪦㪮㪜㪩㩷㪪㪬㪧㪧㪣㪰
䎩䎸䎶䎨䎃䎵䏄䏗䏌䏑䏊
䎧䎦䎱䎲䎱䎨
䎥䏄䏆䏎䎃䎸䏓䎥䏄䏆䏎䎃䎸䏓
䎩䎘䎏䎩䎙䎔䎓䎤䎔䎓䎤
䎩䎚䎏䎩䎛䎔䎘䎤䎕䎤
U1 SW1
Vcc
TP20 24V Vcc TP1 CH2
24V Dimmer
CN7
DC/DC 8bit A 3 1
9
VCC D2 C
Vcc 2
Vcc
7
Zero ADJ.
1 4 1 Switch
2 3 10
2 Zero LED
SIG D5 3 (Green)
FAIL D3
24V Err LED
Vcc Vcc 4
5 (Red)
U3
8
CPUFAIL
OUTB STEPPING STEPPING WDO
RPT.CPU ASSY OUTB MOTOR DRIVER MOTOR
OUTA CONTROL
V8114SN VR1
OUTA
orque adjustment
CN6
1
2
3
9
7
6
5
4
8
10
15
14
12
11
13
1
2
3
9
7
6
5
4
8
10
15
14
12
11
13
CN5
3.14 MKR056 Block Diagram

TB3 TB1 F1 TB2 C
24V 9 24V A
GND 8 GND E,K
7 OUTA
SDA 6 OUTA P.H. ASSY
SDB 5 OUTB V8114TB
1 1 GND 4 OUTB
3 DIM
2 ZERO1
IM80B10M-17E
1 ZERO2 White
< Appendix >
RPT.TB ASSY Yellow

Black STEPPING
V8114SQ Green
Red MOTOR
Blue
Wall mount type ( 1= -W)

A-35
A-36
IM80B10M-17E
U1 SW1
Vcc
TP20 24V Vcc TP1 CH2
24V Dimmer

CN7
DC/DC 8bit A 3 1
< Appendix >
9
VCC D2 C
Vcc 2
Vcc
7
Zero ADJ.
1 4 1 Switch
2 3 10
2 Zero LED
SIG D5 3 (Green)
FAIL D3
24V Err LED
Vcc Vcc 4
5 (Red)
U3
8 CPUFAIL
OUTB STEPPING STEPPING WDO
RPT.CPU ASSY OUTB MOTOR DRIVER MOTOR
OUTA CONTROL
V8114SN VR1
OUTA
orque adjustment
CN6
1
2
3
9
7
6
5
4
8
10
15
14
12
11
13
1
2
3
9
7
6
5
4
8
10
15
14
12
11
13
CN5
TB1 F1 TB2 C
24V 9 24V 9 9 White A
GND 8 GND 8 8 Orange E,K
7 OUTA 7 7 Black
3.15 MKR050&MKN019 Block Diagram

SDA 6 OUTA 6 6 Green P.H. ASSY
SDB 5 OUTB 5 5 Red
1 GND 4 OUTB 4 4 Blue V8114TB
3 DIM 3 3 Yellow
2 ZERO1 2 2 Purple
1 ZERO2 1 1 Gray White
RPT.TB ASSY 16 16 Yellow
Black STEPPING
V8114SQ for Plug type ( 1=P1,2,3,4) Green
Red MOTOR
Blue
CONNECTION BOX MKN015 REPEATER COMPASS MKR050

< Appendix > A-37
Appendix-4 Components List
4.1 Master Compass

(1) MKM026-1,4
36
35
25
13
37 38 39 41 40 42
3 2 4 15 14 5 34 1 7 8
9
6
12 10
11
23
26
33 22
27
32 24
31
18
28
16 29
21 20 19 17 30

A-38 < Appendix >
No PARTS NAME PART NO. No PARTS NAME PART NO.

1 M.MAIN BD ASSY V8123WB 22 FILTER KIT V8817BF
2 PHOTO SENSOR ASSY V8114UQ 23 FAN ASSY V8123GZ
3 TRANS ASSY V8123TC 24 SCREW V8813CZ
4 BRUSH UNIT ASSY V8114LP 25 CABLE ASSY V8114UB
BELT 5T117G008-01 O RING V8005BE
5 26
(for CENTER PIN)
STEPPING MORTER V8114UR CENTER PIN V8123DA
6 27
ASSY
M.PWM INV BD ASSY V8123WE O RING V8810QZ
7 28
(for CONTAINER)
8 M.PS BD ASSY V8123WH 29 LONG NUT V8123CS
9 SPACER V8114LR 30 HOOK ASSY V8123CL
10 SPACER V8114LS 31 SEAL WASHER V8810NE
11 NOISE FILTER V8817BH 32 SCREW Y9303LU
12 M.TERMINAL BD ASSY V8123WK 33 TERMINAL (TB3) V8114VG
13 CIRCUIT PROTECTOR 5T108F017-14 34 CABLE ASSY V8114UA
14 I/F BOARD ASSY V8114SG 35 CABLE ASSY V8114UU
15 MM I/F ASSY V8114SL 36 CABLE ASSY V8123GX
16 SUPPORTING LIQUID V8114ML 37 SLIDE 1J124B038-04
17 CONTAINER V8123DP 38 PLATE 1J355C497-01
18 DAMPER ASSY V8123DQ 39 BRACKET V8210NH
19 GYRO SPHERE MKT007 40 BASE V8801KV
20 DRAIN SCREW V8114DH 41 SPACER V8114EZ
21 O RING (for Drain) V8005BE 42 BUSH 1J371D699-01

< Appendix > A-39
(2) MKM026-2,3
10 9 3 2 4 5
32 6
24
18
23
13
31
22
26
27 27
28
16
15
21 20 19 17
14
1
30 7
25 8
12
29
11

1 M.MAIN BD ASSY V8123WB 17 CONTAINER V8123DP
2 PHOTO SENSOR ASSY V8114UQ 18 DAMPER ASSY V8123DQ
3 TRANS ASSY V8123TC 19 GYRO SPHERE MKT007
4 BRUSH UNIT ASSY V8114LP 20 DRAIN SCREW V8114DH
5 BELT 5T117G008-01 21 O RING (for Drain) V8005BE
6 STEPPING MORTER ASSY V8114UR 22 FILTER KIT V8817BF
7 M.PWM BD ASSY V8123WE 23 FAN ASSY V8123GZ
8 M.PS BD ASSY V8123WH 24 SCREW V8813CZ
9 SPACER V8114LR 25 CABLE ASSY V8114UB
10 SPACER V8114LS 26 R-STOPPER V8123HL
11 NOISE FILTER V8817BH 27 CUSHION V8123HN
12 M.TERMINAL BD ASSY V8123WK 28 F-STOPPER V8123HK
13 CIRCUIT PROTECTOR 5T108F017-14 29 C.TERMINAL BD ASSY V8123VZ/V8123VX(*1)
14 I/F BOARD ASSY V8114SG 30 CABLE ASSY V8114UK
15 MM I/F ASSY V8114SL CABLE ASSY V8114VD
31
(for ANALOG output)
16 SUPPORTING LIQUID V8114ML 32 CABLE ASSY (for FAN) V8123GY
*1: V8123VZ : The ship which does not apply DNV NAUTICAL SAFTY(rule in July 2010)
V8123VX : The ship which apply DNV NAUTICAL SAFTY(rule in July 2010)

A-40 < Appendix >
4.2 Control Box

(1) MKC327-F,W
13 12 1 2 14
10
5
11 6 8

1 FUSE (15A ) 5T151A040-02 8 DUAL PS BD ASSY V8123VR
2 FUSE (2A) A1031EF 9 C.TERMINAL BD ASSY V8123VZ/V8123VX(*1)
3 TOGGLE SWITCH A1351ST 10 CHANGEOVER BD ASSY V8123VT
4 TOGGLE SWITCH ASSY V8123XC 11 TERMINAL V8817CB
5 TERMINAL ASSY V8123MC 12 CABLE ASSY V8116VA
6 R.TERMINAL BD ASSY V8123VN 13 MKR040 SEE APPENDIX 4.8
7 S.TERMINAL BD ASSY V8123VW 14 CLEAR COVER V8123LV

< Appendix > A-41
(2) MKC327-S
12
1
11
2
13 3
15 4
16
8 10 23 17 14 15
6 18 22 21 20 19 5

1 FUSE (15A ) 5T151A040-02 13 SCREW V8813CZ
2 FUSE (2A) A1031EF 14 R-STOPPER V8123HL
3 TOGGLE SWITCH A1351ST 15 CUSHION V8123HN
4 TOGGLE SWITCH ASSY V8123XN 16 F-STOPPER V8123HK
5 TERMINAL ASSY V8123MC 17 DISTRIBUTION BD V8152AC
ASSY (MHB306)
6 R.TERMINAL BD ASSY V8123VN 18 TRANSFORMER (PS101) 1G164A044-01
7 S.TERMINAL BD ASSY V8123VW 19 DIODE MODULE(PS101) A1207HL
8 DUAL PS BD ASSY V8123VR 20 AL CAPACITOR(PS101) A1299CA
9 C.TERMINAL BD ASSY V8123VZ/V8123VX(*1) 21 TERMINAL (PS101) 1G171Z152-05
10 CHANGEOVER BD ASSY V8123VT 22 FUSE (2A)(PS101) A1031EF
11 FILTER KIT V8817BF 23 CONNECTION TOOL V8810QH
(MHB306)
12 FAN ASSY V8123GZ

A-42 < Appendix >
4.3 Repeater Compass (MKR050)
1 3 4 5 2 7
6 10 9 8
NO PARTS NAME PART NO.

1 LED BOARD ASSY V8116VH
2 MOTOR 5T165A165-01
3 WINDOW V8114HP
4 PACKING 1G334C027-01
5 PACKING 1G116A008-01
6 PHOTO SENSOR ASSY V8114UX
7 GASKET 1G333C041-01
8 CABLE ASSY V8114UW
9 CABLE ASSY V8114UV
10 PACKING 1G33E192-01

< Appendix > A-43
4.4 Junction Box (MKN019)
2 1 8 10 11
3 12
No PARTS NAME PART NO.

1 PACKING V8114JP
2 RPT CPU BD ASSY V8114SN
3 TERMINAL BOARD ASSY V8114SQ
4 VARIABLE RESISTOR 5T162B015-02
5 O-RING 5T101Z005-04
6 KNOB 5T124A096-01
7 CAP 5T114A030-01
10 FAIL INDICATOR LED (RED) 5T166F082-01

11 RUN INDICATOR LED (GREEN) 5T166F082-02
12 SOCKET M8096JC

A-44 < Appendix >
4.5 Steering Repeater Compass (MKR056)
22
1
21
2
3
10 B
A
FAIL 19
11
RUN SYNC DIMMER
20
A B
5 6 4 7 8 14 15 13 12 17 16
9 18
A-A B-B

FRONT PANEL V8118BA(□192) COLLAR V8118BS
1 13
V8118BC(□144)
2 SCALE (36X) V8219FV 14 BUTTON 5T124A104-02
3 SCALE (1X) V8118DE 15 O RING 5T101Z005-09
4 GEAR V8114HV 16 RESISTOR (VR) 5T162A167-01
5 GEAR V8114HL 17 KNOB 5T124A043-02
6 GEAR 1G422A549-01 18 COLLAR 5T108F032-07
7 GEAR V8114HN 19 PHOTO SENSOR ASSY V8114UX
8 GEAR V8114RR 20 RPT TB ASSY V8114SQ
9 MOTOR 5T165A165-01 21 RPT CPU BD ASSY V8114SN
FAIL INDICATOR LED
10 5T166F082-03 22 LED BOARD ASSY V8116VH
(RED)
RUN INDICATOR LED
11 5T162F082-04
(GREEN)
12 SWITCH 5T154A272-01

< Appendix > A-45
4.6 AC Adapter (MKS066)

14 13 1 2 12
16 4
15 3
17 6
18 5
19 7
20 8
23
22
9
10
21
11

FUSE (15 A / 2 A)(*1) 5T151A040-02/ FUSE (15 A / 2 A)(*1) 5T151A040-02/
1 13
A1031EF A1031EF
FUSE (15 A / 2 A)(*1) 5T151A040-02/ FUSE (15 A / 2 A)(*1) 5T151A040-02/
2 14
A1031EF A1031EF
3 FUSE (10 A) A1034EF 15 FUSE (10 A) A1034EF
7 SWITCH 5T154A123-01 19 SWITCH 5T154A123-01
8 BACK UP ASSY V8114TD 20 BACK UP ASSY V8114TD
9 TERMINAL BOARD V8116TA 21 NOISE FILTER 5T164E043-01
10 NOISE FILTER 5T164E043-01 22 NOISE FILTER A1118EN
11 NOISE FILTER A1118EN 23 POWER SUPPLY 5T164A255-01
12 POWER SUPPLY 5T164A255-01
*1: with DC BACKUP : 5T151A040-02 (15 A) without DC BACKUP : A1031EF (2 A)

A-46 < Appendix >
4.7 Dual AC Adapter (MKS071)

12
7 1
2
3
8
4
10 11

1 SWITCH 5T154A123-01
2 FUSE (10 A) A1034EF
3 FUSE (15 A / 2 A)(*1) 5T151A040-02/A1031EF
4 FUSE (10 A) A1034EF
5 FUSE (15 A / 2 A)(*1) 5T151A040-02/A1031EF
6 FUSE (2 A) A1031EF
7 POWER SUPPLY V8817CC
8 BACK UP ASSY V8114TD
9 TERMINAL BLOCK V8817EE
10 NOISE FILTER (for AC) 5T614E039-05
11 NOISE FILTER (for DC) V8817BL
12 NOISE FILTER (for AC) V8817BH
*1: with DC BACKUP : 5T151A040-02 (15 A) without DC BACKUP : A1031EF (2 A)

< Appendix > A-47
4.8 Junction Unit (MKN018)

1 C.TERMINAL BD ASSY V8123VZ/V8123VX(*1)

A-48 < Appendix >
4.9 C.Operation Unit (MKR040)

6
1
FAIL
SELECT
GYRO1 BZ STOP
GYRO2
EXT
4
DIMMER / LAMP TEST 2
5
(RED)
(BLACK)

1 FRAME V8116HA
2 MEMBRANE SWITCH V8123RA
3 BUZZER 5T151E007-01
4 C.MAIN BD ASSY V8123VE
5 C.DISP BD ASSY V8123VB
6 CABLE ASSY 50cm V8116VA
1.5m V8221WT
3m V8221WU
5m V8221WV
10m V8116VB

< Appendix > A-49
Appendix-5 Serial Signal Format
5.1 Basic Format

The basic serial signal format is as follows.
All transmitted and received data shall be interpreted as ASCII characters.
• No Checksum 1 2 n
$ , Data field 1 , Data field 2 , Data field n CR LF
(1) (2) (3) (5)
• Use Checksum
1 2 n
$ , Data field 1 , Data field 2 , Data field n ∗ SUM1 SUM2 CR LF
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
(1) “$”:
Start of sentence.
(2) Address field:
This field serves to define the sentence. The first two characters are the talker identifier.
The other three characters are the data identifier.
(3) Data field:

This field is described with regular format data.
Each data is delimited by ",".
(4) Check-sum field :

Check-sum value.
(5) <CR><LF> Terminator:

End of sentence.

A-50 < Appendix >
5.2 Existing Format

CMZ900 system has several regular data format to communicate with external units.
Regular Data Format
Data Type Input Output
Speed (SPD) VMVSD VBW VHW VTG –
Latitude (LAT) GGA GLL –
Heading (HDG) HDT HDG HDM HRC THS HDT HDG HDM THS
Rate of turn (ROT) ROT HRC ROT
Heading / Rate of turn (HDG/ROT) HRC HRC PYDKH
Integrity status – $PYDK(*1)
Alarm manegement IIACK(*1) HEALR(*1)
*1 ) This sentence is for vessel which corresponded DNV NAUTICAL SAFTY(rule in July 2010).
 VMVSD
Offset from “$” 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
-
Character $ V M V S D / x x x , x x x x x x * h h < CR > < LF >
Terminator
Talker ID Y-Speed Cruising distance
−/xx.x[knot] xxxx.xx[Nautical Mile] Checksum
Data ID
Checksum identifier
Header
 VBW
Data field number 1 2 3 4 5 6
Character $ x x V B W , x.x , x.x , A , x.x , x.x , A
Talker ID Data ID Transverse Longitudinal Status:

water speed ground speed Ground speed
Header A=data valid
V=data invalid
Longitudinal Status: Transverse
water speed Water speed ground speed
A=data valid
V=data invalid
7 8 9 10
, x.x , A , x.x , A * hh < CR > < LF >
Terminator
Stern transverse Stern transverse
water speed [knot] ground speed [knot] Checksum
Checksum identifier
Status: Status:
Stern water speed, Stern ground speed,
A=data valid A=data valid
V=data invalid V=data invalid
 VHW
Data field number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Character $ x x V H W , x.x , T , x.x , M x.x , N , x.x , K
Talker ID Data ID
True heading Magnetic heading Water speed [knot] Water speed [km/hour]
Header
* hh < CR > < LF >
Terminator
Checksum
Checksum identifier

< Appendix > A-51
 VTG
Data field number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Character $ x x V T G , x.x , T , x.x , M , x.x , N , x.x , K
Talker ID Data ID
True course made Magnetic course made Ground speed [knot] Ground speed [km/hour]
Header good over ground good over ground
9
, a * hh < CR > < LF >
Terminator
Checksum
Checksum identifier
Status:
A = Autonomous mode
E = Estimated (dead-reckoning) mode
M = Manual Input Mode
S = Simulated Mode
N = Data Not Valid
 GGA
Data field number 1 2 3 4 5 6
Character $ x x G G A , hhmmss.ss , llll.ll , a , yyyyy.yy , a ,
Talker ID Data ID UTC of position Latitude N/S Longitude E/W

Header
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
x , xx , x.x , x.x , M , x.x , M , x.x , xxxx
Number of Horizontal Antenna altitude Geoidal height Age of Differential Differential reference
satellites dilution of GPS data station ID
in use precision
GPS Quality Indicator, Units of antenna Units of geoidal
0 = Fix not available, altitude[m] height [m]
1 = GPS fix,
2 = Differential GPS fix
3 = PPS fix * hh < CR > < LF >
4 = Real Time Kinematic
5 = Float RTK
6 = Estimated (dead reckoning) mode Terminator
7 = Manual input mode Checksum
8 = Simulation mode
Checksum identifier
 GLL
Data field number 1 2 3 4
Character $ x x G L L , llll.ll , a , yyyyy.yy , a
Talker ID Data ID
Latitude Longitude
N/S E/W
Header
5 6 7
, hhmmss.ss , A , a * hh < CR > < LF >
Terminator
UTC of position
Checksum
Checksum identifier
Status:
A = Data valid FAA Mode Indicator
(FAA Mode A,D) A = Autonomous mode
V = Data invalid D = Differential mode
(FAA Mode E,M,S,N) E = Estimated (dead-reckoning) mode
M = Manual input mode
S = Simulated mode
N = Data not valid

A-52 < Appendix >
 HDT
Data field number 1 2
Character $ x x H D T , x.x , T * hh < CR > < LF >
Terminator
Talker ID Data ID
True heading Checksum
Header
T=True Checksum identifier
 HDG
Data field number 1 2 3 4 5
Character $ x x H D G , x.x , x.x , a , x.x , a
Talker ID Data ID
Magnetic Magnetic
Header Magnetic sensor deviation[degrees] variation [degrees]
heading direction E / W direction E / W
* hh < CR > < LF >
Terminator
Checksum
Checksum identifier
 HDM

Character $ x x H D M , x.x , M * hh < CR > < LF >
Terminator
Talker ID Data ID
Magnetic Checksum
Header Heading
Checksum identifier
 THS

Character $ x x T H S , x.x , A * hh < CR > < LF >
Data ID Terminator
Talker ID Heading
Checksum
Header
Status: Checksum identifier
A = Autonomous mode
E = Estimated (dead-reckoning) mode
M = Manual input mode
S = Simulated mode
V = Data not valid

< Appendix > A-53
 ROT

Character $ x x R O T , x.x , A * hh < CR > < LF >
Talker ID Data ID Rate of turn Terminator

[degrees/minute] Check sum
"-" means
Header bow turns to port Check sum identifier
Status,
A =data valid
V =data invalid
 HRC
Offset from “$” 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

-
Character $ H C H R C x x x x x , / x x x * h h < CR > < LF >
Heading Terminator
Talker ID
xxx.xx[degrees] Check sum
Data ID
Header Rate of turn Check sum identifier
-/x .xx[degrees/second]
 PYDKH
Data field Number 1 2 3
Character $ P Y D K H , x.xx , x.xx , x * hh < CR > < LF >
Heading [degrees] Rate of turn Terminator

Talker ID - / x.xx
Data ID [degrees/minute] Checksum
Header Instrument identifier Checksum identifier

1=Gyro No.1
2=Gyro No.2
3=External Gyro
4=External Mag
5=External GPS Compass
 PYDK
㻰㼍㼠㼍㻌㼒㼕㼑㼘㼐㻌㼚㼡㼙㼎㼑㼞㻝㻞㻟㻠㻡㻢
㻯㼔㼍㼞㼍㼏㼠㼛㼞㻐㻼㼅㻰㻷㻘㻴㻱㻘㼤㻘㼤㻘㼤㻘㼤㻘㼤㻘㼤㻖㼔㼔㻨㻌㻯㻾㻌㻪㻨㻌㻸㻲㻌㻪
㼀㼑㼞㼙㼕㼚㼍㼠㼛㼞
㻰㼍㼠㼍㻌㻵㻰
㻯㼔㼑㼏㼗㼟㼡㼙
㻯㼔㼑㼏㼗㼟㼡㼙㻌㼕㼐㼑㼚㼠㼕㼒㼕㼑㼞
㻼㼞㼛㼜㼞㼕㼍㼠㼍㼞㼥㻌㻵㻰
㻹㼍㼟㼠㼑㼞㻌㼏㼛㼙㼜㼍㼟㼟㻌㼟㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠㻌㼟㼠㼍㼠㼡㼟
㻴㼑㼍㼐㼑㼞㻭㻩㻿㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠㼑㼐
㼀㼍㼘㼗㼑㼞㻌㻵㻰㼂㻩㼁㼚㼟㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠㼑㼐
㻿㼜㼑㼑㼐㻌㼑㼞㼞㼛㼞㻌㼏㼛㼞㼞㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼟㼠㼍㼠㼡㼟㻭㼘㼕㼓㼚㼙㼑㼚㼠㻌㼟㼠㼍㼠㼡㼟
㻭㻩㻭㼡㼠㼛㼙㼍㼠㼕㼏㻜㻩㻺㼛㼞㼙㼍㼘㻌㼔㼑㼍㼐㼕㼚㼓
㼂㻩㻹㼍㼚㼡㼍㼘㼥㻝㻩㻵㼚㻌㼍㼘㼕㼓㼚㼙㼑㼚㼠㻌㼔㼑㼍㼐㼕㼚㼓
㻰㼑㼢㼕㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼍㼘㼍㼞㼙㻔㻳㻝㻛㻳㻝㻕㻌㼟㼠㼍㼠㼡㼟㻴㼑㼍㼐㼕㼚㼓㻌㼟㼛㼡㼞㼏㼑㻌㻵㻰
㻭㻩㻺㼛㻌㼍㼘㼍㼞㼙㻌㼛㼏㼏㼡㼞㼞㼑㼐㻝㻩㻻㼣㼚㻌㼔㼑㼍㼐㼕㼚㼓
㼂㻩㻭㼘㼍㼞㼙㻌㼛㼏㼏㼡㼞㼞㼑㼐㻞㻩㻱㼤㼠㼑㼞㼚㼍㼘㻌㼔㼑㼍㼐㼕㼚㼓㻔㼀㼍㼘㼗㼑㼞㻌㻵㻰㻦㻴㻱㻕
㻟㻩㻱㼤㼠㼑㼞㼚㼍㼘㻌㼔㼑㼍㼐㼕㼚㼓㻔㼀㼍㼘㼗㼑㼞㻌㻵㻰㻦㻴㻯㻕
㻠㻩㻱㼤㼠㼑㼞㼚㼍㼘㻌㼔㼑㼍㼐㼕㼚㼓㻔㼀㼍㼘㼗㼑㼞㻌㻵㻰㻦㻳㻼㻕
㻯㼛㼙㼜㼍㼟㼟㻌㻵㻰㻌㼍㼚㼐㻌㼟㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠㼑㼐㻌㼔㼑㼍㼐㼕㼚㼓㻌㼟㼠㼍㼠㼡㼟
㻝㻩㻳㼥㼞㼛㻌㻺㼛㻚㻝
㻞㻩㻳㼥㼞㼛㻌㻺㼛㻚㻞
㻟㻩㻱㼤㼠㼑㼞㼚㼍㼘

A-54 < Appendix >
 IIACK
㻰㼍㼠㼍㻌㼒㼕㼑㼘㼐㻌㼚㼡㼙㼎㼑㼞㻝
㻯㼔㼍㼞㼍㼏㼠㼛㼞㻐㻵㻵㻭㻯㻷㻘㼤㼤㼤㻖㼔㼔㻨㻌㻯㻾㻌㻪㻨㻌㻸㻲㻌㻪
㻰㼍㼠㼍㻌㻵㻰㼀㼑㼞㼙㼕㼚㼍㼠㼛㼞
㻯㼔㼑㼏㼗㼟㼡㼙㻌㼕㼐㼑㼚㼠㼕㼒㼕㼑㼞
㼀㼍㼘㼗㼑㼞㻌㻵㻰
㼁㼚㼕㼝㼡㼑㻌㼍㼘㼍㼞㼙㻌㼚㼡㼙㼎㼑㼞㻌㻔㼕㼐㼑㼚㼠㼕㼒㼕㼑㼞㻕㻌㼍㼠㻌㼍㼘㼍㼞㼙㻌㼟㼛㼡㼞㼏㼑
㻴㼑㼍㼐㼑㼞
HEALR
㻰㼍㼠㼍㻌㼒㼕㼑㼘㼐㻌㼚㼡㼙㼎㼑㼞㻝㻞㻟㻠㻡
㻯㼔㼍㼞㼍㼏㼠㼛㼞㻐㻴㻱㻭㻸㻾㻘㻘㼤㼤㼤㻘㼤㻘㼤㻘㼏㻙㼏㻖㼔㼔㻨㻌㻯㻾㻌㻪㻨㻌㻸㻲㻌㻪
㻰㼍㼠㼍㻌㻵㻰㼀㼑㼞㼙㼕㼚㼍㼠㼛㼞
㼀㼍㼘㼗㼑㼞㻌㻵㻰㻯㼔㼑㼏㼗㼟㼡㼙㻌㼕㼐㼑㼚㼠㼕㼒㼕㼑㼞
㻴㼑㼍㼐㼑㼞
㻭㼘㼍㼞㼙䇻㼟㻌㼐㼑㼟㼏㼞㼕㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚㼠㼑㼤㼠
㼁㼚㼕㼝㼡㼑㻌㼍㼘㼍㼞㼙㻌㼚㼡㼙㼎㼑㼞㻌㻔㼕㼐㼑㼚㼠㼕㼒㼕㼑㼞㻕㻌㼍㼠㻌㼍㼘㼍㼞㼙㻌㼟㼛㼡㼞㼏㼑
㻭㼘㼍㼞㼙㻌㼍㼏㼗㼚㼛㼣㼘㼍㼓㼑㻌㼟㼠㼍㼠㼡㼟
㻭㻩㻭㼘㼍㼞㼙㻌㼔㼍㼟㻌㼎㼑㼑㼚㻌㼍㼏㼗㼚㼛㼣㼘㼑㼐㼓㼑㼐
㼂㻩㻭㼘㼍㼞㼙㻌㼔㼍㼟㻌㼚㼛㼠㻌㼎㼑㼑㼚㻌㼍㼏㼗㼚㼛㼣㼘㼑㼐㼓㼑㼐㻌㼛㼞㻌㼛㼏㼏㼡㼞㼞㼑㼐
㻭㼘㼍㼞㼙㻌㼏㼛㼚㼐㼕㼠㼕㼛㼚
㻭㻩㻭㼘㼍㼞㼙㻌㼛㼏㼏㼡㼞㼞㼕㼚㼓
㼂㻩㻭㼘㼍㼞㼙㻌㼔㼍㼟㻌㼎㼑㼑㼚㻌㼏㼘㼑㼍㼞㻌㼛㼞㻌㼚㼛㼠㻌㼛㼏㼏㼡㼞㼞㼑㼐

< Appendix > A-55
5.3 Heading Output for Repeater compass

 HEHDT (for Repeater compass)
The heading signal for repeater compass has two digits after the decimal point.
Offset from “$” 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

Character -/ < CR > < LF >
$ H E H D T , x x x . ,
x x , T * h h
Terminator
Talker ID Heading
xxx.xx [degrees] Checksum
Data ID
Checksum Identifier
Header

Blank Page
Revision Information
 Title : CMZ 900D Gyrocompass User’s Manual
 Manual No. : IM80B10M-17E
Dec, 2007 1st Edition

Apr, 2009 2nd Edition
Sep, 2009 3rd Edition
Jul, 2012 4th Edition
Dec, 2012 5th Edition
Aug, 2014 6th Edition
 Inquiries
For inquiries about the content of this manual, please visit the following URL. Also
visit the Yokogawa Denshikiki website at the following address for information on
this product.
URL for inquiries:
Yokogawa Denshikiki website: http://www.yokogawa.com/ydk/
 Written by Yokogawa Denshikiki Co,.Ltd.
 Published by Yokogawa Denshikiki Co,.Ltd.
5-23-13 Sendagaya, Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-0051, JAPAN

Blank Page

IM CMZ900D E 6th

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

IM CMZ900D E 6th

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

IM CMZ900D E 6th

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CMZ 900D

IM80B10M-17E 6th Edition

IM80B10M-17E 6th Edition : Aug.01,2014-00

IM80B10M-17E 6th Edition : Aug.01,2014-00

IM80B10M-17E 6th Edition : Aug.01,2014-00

IM80B10M-17E 6th Edition : Aug.01,2014-00

 About this manual

 Notes about environmental condition for using

 Notes about installation

 Notes about preparation before using

IM80B10M-17E 6th Edition : Aug.01,2014-00

 Notes about using other than usage

 Notes about maintenance and inspection

 Notes about abnormal circumstances

 Notes about disposal of the products

 Notes about disposal of the used supporting liquid

 Precautions related to the protection, safety, and alteration of the product

"Handle with care." To avoid injury and damage to the instrument,

“Risk of Electric Shock”

Protective ground terminal

"High temperature." To avoid injury caused by hot surface, do not

IM80B10M-17E 6th Edition : Aug.01,2014-00

 Exemption from responsibility

 How to use this manual

IM80B10M-17E 6th Edition : Aug.01,2014-00

Risk of Electric Shock

Turn off the power before carrying out any wiring.

 About the replacement parts for repair

IM80B10M-17E 6th Edition : Aug.01,2014-00

 Handling in cold districts

 External heading out put

IM80B10M-17E 6th Edition : Aug.01,2014-00

 G1/G2 gyro select switch on the changeover unit

 Action method to heading changeover failure

IM80B10M-17E 6th Edition : Aug.01,2014-00

1.1 Features of CMZ900

 Excellent vibration resistance and shock resistance

 Improvement of follow-up performance

 Digitalization of Master compass heading

 Automatic speed-error correcting function

 Functions for various displays and settings

 Preparation of outputs corresponding to every requirement

 Onboard battery drive

IM80B10M-17E 6th Edition : Aug.01,2014-00

 Built-in startup timer

 Heading output using external azimuth sensor signal

 Dynamic speed error correction(Option)

 Correspondence to DNV NAUTICAL SAFTY(rule in July 2010:option)

IM80B10M-17E 6th Edition : Aug.01,2014-00

1.2 Gyrocompass System

 Repeater compass / Steering repeater compass

See chapter 2. for detail of system construction.

IM80B10M-17E 6th Edition : Aug.01,2014-00

1.3 Device Composition Type

 CMZ900B (Not explain in this manual)

 CMZ900S (Not explain in this manual)

IM80B10M-17E 6th Edition : Aug.01,2014-00

1.4 Connection with External Devices

1.4.1 Input Signal